JVC LCT1215 001A H User Manual

COLOUR TELEVISION  
HV-34LPZ  
HV-29LPZ  
Contents  
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6  
Remote control buttons  
and functions . . . 8  
Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20  
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21  
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24  
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LCT1215-001A-H  
0402-Ki-NV-JMT  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Setting up your TV  
CAUTION  
Turn off all the epuipment including the TV  
before connecting anything.  
1
Connecting the aerial and VCR  
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good  
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.  
Fig.A  
• Read the manual that came with the VCR  
before connecting.  
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :  
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket  
on this TV .  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :  
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial  
input socket on the VCR, and  
connect the VCR and TV with  
another aerial cable.  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack and the TV's  
VIDEO jack with a video cable.  
AV COMPULINK  
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO  
cable:  
Fig.B  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-  
VIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a  
video cable .  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
A
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's  
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with  
an audio cable.  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect  
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack  
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an  
audio cable.  
You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if  
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.  
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK  
Supported Devices” on page 38.  
3
Setting up your TV  
2 Connecting the power cord  
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.  
3 Putting the batteries into the  
Remote control  
Use two AA/R6 batteries.  
Insert the batteries from the  
end, making sure the  
and polaritiles are correct.  
Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.  
If the remote control does not work properly,  
replace the batteries.  
The batteries we supply are only for setting up  
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon  
as necessary.  
4 Making the initial settings  
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial  
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.  
1 Press the main power button on the TV  
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.  
If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does  
not change to green, your TV is in the standby  
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote  
control to turn the TV on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has  
already been turned before. In this case,use the  
"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions  
to make the initial settings. For details, see  
"INSTALL menu" on page 29.  
POWER lamp  
Main power button  
2 Press the MENU/OK button  
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose  
a language for the on-screen language.  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
4
Setting up your TV  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to choose  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are automatically  
stored in the programme numbers list.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
AUTO PROGRAM  
CH  
10  
7
20%  
RETURN  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press  
the DISPLAY button.  
MUTING  
4 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number (PR)  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
EDIT  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in  
the programme numbers list, you can register it  
using the MANUAL function.  
TEXT  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a  
TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL  
function, press the MENU/OK button to close the  
EDIT menu.  
Now, the setting up is complete.  
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!  
5
TV buttons and functions  
Turn the main power on  
Press the main power button 1 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is  
in the standby mode.  
To turn the main power off :  
press the main power button again.  
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.  
Turn the TV on from standby  
mode  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and  
your TV will be turned on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
You can also turn on the TV by pressing the  
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby  
mode.  
8 2  
7
Choose a TV channel  
1
9
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Choose a VIDEO terminal  
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or  
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Adjust the volume  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .  
The volume level indicater appears.  
MENU button 6  
Press to open the menu.  
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on  
the TV" on page 19.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Remote control sensor  
and ECO sensor 9  
0
-
6 5 4 3  
ECO lamp 7  
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.  
6
TV buttons and functions  
SPATIALIZER lamp 8  
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO  
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.  
Headphone jack 0  
Connect the headphones with a stereo  
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).  
When using the headphones, follow the  
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 25.  
A
UDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
A
UDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
L
/
M
O
N
O
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
VIDEO-1 terminal =  
See page 3 and 36.  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-2 terminal ~  
See page 36.  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
=
~
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDLI/OMONO  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal !  
!
@
OUTPUT  
See page 28 and 36.  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPU LINK  
VIDEO-4 terminal -  
See page 36.  
$
#
OUTPUT terminal @  
See page 36.  
Aerial socket #  
Connect the aerial cable.  
See page 3.  
AV COMPU LINK terminal $  
See page 36 and 38.  
7
Remote control buttons and functions  
Turn the TV on from standby mode  
Press the POWER button.  
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be  
turned on.  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MODE  
You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To turn the TV off:  
Press the POWER button again.  
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV  
enters standby mode.  
7
RETURN  
Choose a TV channel  
MULTI  
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has  
been set.  
MUTING  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the  
programme number (PR) with the number  
buttons.  
If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,  
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry  
system.  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For  
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.  
MENU/  
OK  
If you do not have a clear picture or no colour  
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR  
SYSTEM button" on page 11.  
If you cannot hear sound normally even when the  
picture appears normally, follow the operation  
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
Adjust the volume  
TEXT  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.  
You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.  
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 25.  
8
Remote control buttons and functions  
16:9  
Watch images from external  
devices  
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external  
device has been connected.  
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3  
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-  
pect ratio).  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the  
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.  
To return to a TV channel:  
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect  
ratio that have been squeezed into a  
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you  
can restore their original demensions.  
MUTING button  
Press the MUTING button to turn off  
the volume. Pressing the MUTING  
button again resumes the previous  
volume level.  
SPATIALIZER button  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a  
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER  
function.  
Press the SPATIALIZER button to  
choose a mode.  
ZOOM button  
You can change the screen size according to the  
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one  
from the following ZOOM modes.  
LIVE :  
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo  
sound converting it into surround sound  
with added depth and ambience.  
Press the ZOOM button to choose a  
mode.  
MONO :  
If you press the ZOOM button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen and  
the ZOOM function does not operate.  
Mono allows you to enjoy normal  
monaural sound by converting it into a  
stereo-like sound.  
OFF :  
REGULAR  
This function is turned off.  
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as  
its original size is.  
The LIVE mode works properly only  
with stereo sound.  
The LIVE mode does not work  
correctly with headphones.  
The MONO mode works properly only  
with monaural sound.  
ZOOM  
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect  
ratio) to fill the TV screen.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The left side and right side of the Wide  
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.  
9
Remote control buttons and functions  
To register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
BASS button  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
Choose the Programme number to which  
the channel you want to register has been  
set, and press the RETURN+ button and  
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.  
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is  
displayed and the registration is com-  
pleted.  
Press the BASS button to turn the  
SUPER BASS function on or off.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
To cancel register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
while viewing any TV channel, press the  
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3  
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS  
CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-  
ration is cancelled.  
PICTURE MODE button  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to  
adjust the picture settings automatically.  
When you turn off the TV, the  
registration for the "Return Channel" is  
cancelled.  
Press the PICTURE MODE button  
choose a mode.  
If you want to view the "Return Channel"  
and another TV channel alternately, first  
choose a channel other than the  
"Return Channel". and then press the  
RETURN+ button to change the  
channel to the "Return Channel" In this  
way, you can view two channels  
alternately by pressing the RETURN+  
button.  
BRIGHT :  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
STANDARD :  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
SOFT :  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
RETURN function :  
The TV temporarily memorises the TV  
channel that was choosen right before the  
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".  
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can  
alternately view the current TV channel and  
the "Last Channel".  
RETURN+ button  
The RETURN+ button has two functions;  
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN  
function. If a channel has been registerd as  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+  
function operates. If there is no setting for  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN  
function operates.  
If you want to view two channels  
alternately by using the RETURN  
function, first choose one TV channel  
and then choose the other TV channel  
with the Number buttons. If you choose  
the TV channel without using the  
Number buttons, there are cases where  
a channel other than the one you first  
chose is registered as the "Last  
Channel".  
RETURN+ function :  
By registering a channel you frequently  
view as the "Return Channel", you can  
select that channel at any time simply by  
pressing the RETURN+ button.  
10  
Remote control buttons and functions  
/ button  
Choose a TV channel or a  
VIDEO terminal  
1 Press the DISPLAY button to  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
display the PR LIST.  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons  
to choose a programme number  
or VIDEO terminal.  
Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
Press the  
choose a sound mode.  
/ button to  
For programme numbers with the  
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed  
next to the programme number in the PR  
LIST.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
The VIDEO terminals are registered after  
the programme number PR99.  
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
COLOUR SYSTEM button  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button  
to choose the appropriate colour  
system.  
DISPLAY button  
You can display the PR LIST, programme  
number or VIDEO terminal number on the  
screen.  
AUTO :  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
Press the DISPLAY button changes the  
display as follows:  
This function detects a colour system from  
the input signal.  
The AUTO mode may not function  
properly if you have poor signal quality.  
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO  
mode, choose another colour system  
manually.  
PR LIST  
PR  
ID  
1
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
The AUTO mode detects a colour system  
from the input signal and chooses the  
appropiate colour system automatically.  
No indication  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of  
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour  
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15  
for details.  
-10  
+10  
11  
Remote control buttons and functions  
For the colour systems in each  
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS  
For sound sysytem colour system in your country  
or rigion, refer to the table below.  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
SOUND SYSTEM button  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
The sound system is chosen automati-  
cally. However, if you cannot hear the  
sound normally even when the picture  
appears normally, chooes the sound  
system maunually.  
PAL  
Asia,  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
PAL  
PAL  
Middle  
East  
Press the SOUND SYSTEM  
button to choose the appropriate  
sound system.  
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
SECAM  
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
NTSC  
SECAM  
PAL  
Russia, etc  
B/G : B/G system  
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
I
: I system  
PAL  
D/K : D/K system  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
M
: M system  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
Africa  
This function does not work in the  
Nigeria, etc  
PAL  
VIDEO mode.  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
SECAM  
For the sound systems in each  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
SOUND SYSTEM  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
B/G  
Asia,  
Middle  
East  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
D/K  
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
B/G  
M
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
Russia, etc  
D/K  
D/K  
B/G  
I
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
B/G  
I
Africa  
Nigeria, etc  
B/G  
B/G  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
12  
Remote control buttons and functions  
If you press the STROBE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the STROBE function does  
not operate.  
FREEZE button  
You can view the Main picture's forzen image  
as the SUB-picture.  
Press the FREEZE button.  
You cannot change the TINT setting for  
the still images on the screen even if  
you are viewing a programme with  
NTSC colour system.  
Still pictures  
MAIN  
To cancel the FREEZE function :  
Press the FREEZE button again.  
Using the MULTI  
function  
You can display multi-pictures that enable  
you to easily find a program you want to  
view.  
You cannot use the FREEZE button when  
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are  
displayed on the screen.  
If you press the FREEZE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the FREEZE function does  
not operate.  
1 Press the MULTI button.  
Press the MULTI button changes the  
display as follow:  
5-pictures multi mode  
2
1
STROBE button  
Still  
pictures  
3
4
5
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15  
consecutive still images.  
MAIN  
Press the STROBE button.  
Moving  
picture  
16-pictures multi mode  
1
2
4
3
Still  
5
6
8
7
pictures  
Moving  
picture  
9
10  
14  
12  
16  
11  
15  
5
13  
Moving  
picture  
To cancel the STROBE function:  
Press the STROBE button to return to the  
MAIN-picture.  
If signal level of the MAIN-picture is  
weak, the still images become abnormal.  
Cancel the MULTI function  
You cannot use the STROBE button  
when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-  
picture are displayed on the screen.  
To display next Multi pictures :  
Press the NEXT button.  
13  
Remote control buttons and functions  
2 Choose the desired picture with  
Using the PIP function  
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at  
the same time.  
the  
/
and  
/
buttons, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
The screen switches to the TV channel or  
VIDEO mode of your choice.  
Press the PIP button.  
Press the PIP button changes the display as  
follows:  
Any programme numbers to which no TV  
channel has been registered, or  
programme numbers to which  
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not  
displayed.  
Twin pictures mode  
2
5
You cannot perform menu operations  
such as headphone volume adjustment.  
Cancel the MULTI function once to  
perform menu operations.  
MAIN  
SUB  
If you press the MULTI button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the MULTI function does not  
operate.  
Picture in picture mode  
2
SUB  
5
MAIN  
During the short period that is required  
for the Multi-pictures display to close no  
sound comes from the television.  
Cancel the PIP function  
You cannot view a picture from the same  
programme number (or the same VIDEO  
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and  
the SUB-picture at the same time.  
If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the  
quality of the SUB-picture may also be  
poor.  
If the picture standards of both pictures  
are different, the top and bottom or one of  
them may be missing.  
The ZOOM function does not operate  
when viewing pictures using the PIP  
function.  
The SUB-picture cannot be output from  
TV.  
If you press the PIP button when receiving  
the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen  
and the PIP function does not operate.  
14  
Remote control buttons and functions  
You cannot change the COLOUR  
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the  
COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote  
control.  
Choose a TV channel for  
the SUB-picture  
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.  
POSITION button  
You can adjust the position of the SUB-  
Picture when using the Picture in picture  
mode.  
Listen to the sound of SUB-  
picture  
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on  
your headphones while listening to the sound  
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.  
Press the POSITION button  
repeatedly.  
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.  
Each time you press the button, the SUB-  
Picture moves counterclockwise.  
Change the colour system  
of the SUB-picture  
1 While the SUB-picture is dis-  
played, press the MENU/OK  
button to display the MENU  
(main manu).  
/
/
2 Press the  
and  
buttons  
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,  
and then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
SWAP button  
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the  
SUB-picture with each other.  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
Press the SWAP button.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
MAIN  
SUB  
NTSC 3.58  
AUTO  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the  
choose SUB, and then press the  
buttons to choose the  
/
buttons to  
Do not press the SWAP button while you  
are recording the TV output on the VCR.  
If you do, the output signal will change.  
/
appropriate colour system. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
15  
Remote control buttons and functions  
Viewing a teletext  
programme  
1 Choose a TV channel with a  
teletext broadcast.  
HOLD button  
You can hold a teletext page on the screen  
for as long as you want, even while several  
other teletext pages are being received.  
Press the HOLD button.  
2 Press the TV/TEXT button.  
The  
(hold) are displayed at the top left  
Press the TV/TEXT button changes the  
mode as follows:  
of the screen.  
To cancel the Hold function:  
Press the HOLD button again.  
REVEAL button  
Some teletext pages include hidden text  
(such as answers to a quiz).  
TV mode  
TV and  
Text mode  
You can display the hidden text.  
Each time you press the REVEAL  
button, text is hidden or revealed.  
SIZE button  
Text mode  
You can double the height of teletext  
display.  
3 Choose a teletext page by  
pressing the CHANNEL-/+  
buttons, number buttons or  
coloured buttons.  
Press the SIZE button.  
INDEX button  
You can return to the index page instantly.  
To return to the TV mode:  
Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO  
button.  
Press the INDEX button.  
In the List mode, you can return to the  
page number displayed in the lower left  
area of the screen.  
If you have trouble receiving tetetext  
broadcasts, consult your local dealer or  
the broadcast station.  
CANCEL button  
You can serch for a teletext page while  
watching TV.  
In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is  
fixed to the REGULAR mode.  
No menu operations are possible when  
viewing a teletext programme.  
1 Press the number button to  
enter a page number, or press  
the coloured button.  
If characters on a teletext programme do  
not appear properly, change the  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For  
details, see TELETEXT LANGUAGEon  
page 34.  
The TV searches for a teletext page.  
16  
Remote control buttons and functions  
2 Press the CANCEL button.  
Using the List mode  
You can store the numbers of your favourite  
teletext pages in memory and call them up  
quickly using the coloured buttons.  
The TV programme appears. When the  
TV finds the teletext page, its page  
number appears in the upper left of the  
screen.  
To store the page numbers :  
1 Press the MODE button to  
engage the List mode.  
3 Press the CANCEL button to  
return to a teletext page when  
the page number is on the  
screen.  
The stored page numbers are displayed  
at the buttom of the screen.  
You cannot return to the TV mode with  
the CANCEL button.  
2 Press a coloured button to  
choose a position. Then press  
the number buttons to enter the  
page number.  
SUBPAGE button  
Some teletext pages include sub-pages that  
are automatically displayed. You can hold  
any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.  
3 Press and hold down the  
STORE button.  
1 Press the SUBPAGE button to  
operate the Sub-page function.  
The four page numbers blink white to  
indicate that they are stored in memory.  
Sub-page numbers are displayed at the  
left of the screen.  
To call up a stored page :  
1 Press the MODE button to  
engage the List mode.  
2 Press a coloured button to  
which a page has been as-  
signed.  
Colour*  
Yellow  
White  
Meaning of sub-page number  
Currently being displayed.  
Can be displayed.  
Cannot be displayed and  
it is not sent.  
Blue or Red  
* : Background color of the sub-page  
number.  
To exit the List mode :  
Press the MODE button again.  
2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons  
to choose a sub-page number.  
To cancel the Sub-page function:  
Press the SUBPAGE button again.  
17  
Using the TV's menu  
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.  
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating  
techniques fully.  
Basic operation  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display  
PICTURE  
MODE  
the MENU (main menu).  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
MENU  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
PICTURE SETTING  
PICTURE FEATURES  
SOUND SETTING  
FEATURES  
INSTALL  
DEMO  
6
9
7
OK  
:OK  
RETURN  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
The display appearing at the bottom of a menu  
indicates buttons on the remote control you  
can use when you operate a chosen function.  
MUTING  
MENU/OK button  
TV/VIDEO button  
DISPLAY button  
OK  
TV  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
DISP.  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons to  
choose a menu title, and press the  
MENU/OK button.  
The menu appears.  
To return to the previous menu:  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
To exit a menu instantly:  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
TEXT  
3 Press the  
function.  
/
buttons to choose a  
For details of the functions in the menus, see  
the following pages.  
18  
Using the TV's menu  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose the setting of that func-  
tion.  
If you want to operate a function which  
appears only with its name, follow the  
descriptions of that function on the  
following pages.  
5 Press the MENU/OK button to  
comple the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
When watching the television with the  
NTSC system, the menus are displayed  
at about half of their normal verical size.  
Operation with the  
buttons on the TV  
You can also operate the menus using the  
buttons on the front panel of the TV.  
OK  
button  
TV/VIDEO  
button  
/
/
buttons  
buttons  
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
There is no button on the front panel of  
the TV that has the function of the  
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.  
19  
Using the TV's menu  
PICTURE SETTING menu  
SHARP  
You can adjust the picture sharpness.  
PICTURE SETTING  
: softer  
: sharper  
PICTURE MODE  
CONTRAST  
STANDARD  
BRIGHT  
SHARP  
COLOUR  
You cannot select the SHARP function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
TINT  
WHITE BALANCE  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
MID  
ON  
OK  
:OK  
RESET  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
COLOUR  
You can adjust the picture colour.  
: lighter  
: deeper  
PICTURE MODE  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs to adjust the picture settings  
automatically.  
TINT  
You can adjust the picture tint.  
: reddish  
BRIGHT:  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
: greenish  
STANDARD:  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
You can change the TINT setting (picture  
tint) only when the colour system is  
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.  
SOFT:  
You cannot select the TINT function when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal).  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
You can also operate the PICTURE  
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE  
button on the remote control.  
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"  
on page 10.  
To return to the default settings  
in each PICTURE MODE :  
Press the blue button. Returns the picture  
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE  
MODE mode to the default settings, and  
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.  
Adjusting the picture  
You can change the picture settings of each  
picture mode as you like. The picture settings  
changed are stored in the picture mode.  
WHITE BALANCE  
You can select one of three WHITE  
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to  
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since  
white is the colour which is used as a  
refernce for all the other colours, changing  
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the  
appearance of all the other colours on the  
screen.  
CONTRAST  
You can adjust the picture contrast.  
: lower  
: higer  
BRIGHT  
You can adjust the picture brighetness.  
: darker  
: brighter  
COOL:  
A bluish white. Using this mode when  
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy  
a more vivid and bright picture.  
20  
Using the TV's menu  
MID:  
PICTURE FEATURES menu  
The normal white colour.  
PICTURE FEATURES  
WARM:  
DIGITAL VNR  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
DigiPure  
PULL DOWN  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
ZOOM  
A raddish white. Using this mode when  
watching films allows you to enjoy colours  
that are characteristic of films.  
PICTIRE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE  
function in the Twin pictures mode or the  
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.  
DISP  
:BACK  
DIGITAL VNR  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the  
amount of noise in the original picture.  
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-  
matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the  
brightness of your room. This reduces eye  
strain for you and the power consumption of  
the TV.  
You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR  
function when receiving the Progressive  
Video Signal (525P signal).  
AUTO:  
The TV will be automatically adjust the level  
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the  
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the  
best possible picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too  
high it can make the picture less sharp.  
It is recommended to use the AUTO  
setting if you can.  
DISPLAY :  
This function is turned on. Further, clover  
marks indicating the brightness of your  
room are displayed for several seconds each  
time the brightness changes. The number of  
clover marks displayed on the screen  
MAX:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,  
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.  
increases as your room becomes darker.  
The MAX setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
MIN:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness  
of the original picture has not been  
reproduced fully, change the setting from  
AUTO to MIN.  
The MIN setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
21  
Using the TV's menu  
MIN:  
DigiPure  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function  
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the  
setting from AUTO to MIN.  
The Digipure function uses the latest in  
digital technology to give you a natural  
looking picture. The Digipure function  
includes the following two functions.  
• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain very little  
noise.  
Digipure function:  
This function helps to create a natural looking  
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges  
from high-contrast and crisp images.  
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,  
edges are added to produce a sharper, more  
detailed picture.  
OFF:  
The DigiPure function is turned off.  
PULL DOWN  
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema  
film picture more smoothly and naturally on  
the screen.  
You can choose from the DigiPure function  
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.  
Picture motion compensation  
function:  
This function displays fast-moving pictures  
(for example, the players or ball in a football  
game) more smoothly and naturally on the  
screen.  
AUTO:  
This function is turned on. Normally keep this  
function set to AUTO.  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
You cannot select the Digipure function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
• The motion may appear unnatural when  
viewing images with the NTSC colour  
system. To make the motion smoother,  
switch the PULL DOWN function from  
AUTO to OFF.  
AUTO:  
The TV will automatically adjust the level of  
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of  
noise in the picture, giving the best possible  
picture.  
You cannot select this function in the  
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in  
picture mode.  
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on  
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of  
noise, this may actually make the noise  
worse. It is recommended to use the  
AUTO setting if you can.  
MAX:  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to  
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality  
has not been reproduced fully, change the  
setting from AUTO to MAX.  
• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
22  
Using the TV's menu  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
ZOOM  
You can change the screen size according to  
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum  
one of three ZOOM modes.  
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the  
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
MENU/OK button.  
ZOOM  
REGULAR  
ZOOM  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
16:9  
PAL  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
/
2 Press the  
buttons to choose  
choose a ZOOM mode. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The picture expands and the chosen  
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5  
seconds.  
the appropriate colour system.  
Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
When changing to the COLOUR  
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see  
"Change the colour system of the SUB-  
picture" on page 15 for details.  
You can choose a ZOOM mode from  
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For  
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.  
You can also operate the COLOUR  
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR  
SYSTEM button on the remote control.  
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM  
button" on page 11.  
You cannot select the ZOOM function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
PICTURE TILT  
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic  
force may make the picture tilt. If this  
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.  
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
PICTURE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons until the  
picture becomes level. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
23  
Using the TV's menu  
SOUND SETTING menu  
BALANCE  
You can adjust the volume balance between  
the left and right speakers.  
SOUND SETTING  
MONO  
STEREO/  
BASS  
TREBLE  
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.  
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.  
BALANCE  
AI VOLUME  
BBE  
SPATIALIZER  
SUPER BASS  
HEADPHONE  
ON  
ON  
LIVE  
ON  
AI VOLUME  
OK  
:OK  
You can prevent the sudden increase or  
decrease of sound that occurs when  
changing the channel to another channel or  
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO  
mode.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
STEREO / I•II  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and  
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.  
For example, you can set it to be OFF in  
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.  
If you set the AI VOLUME function while  
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,  
the setting is registered as the setting for  
VIDEO mode.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate  
as expected if the sound input level from  
a broadcast station (or video software) is  
extremely low.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
BBE  
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-  
to-listen sound that is faithful to the original  
sound recorded.  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound to your liking.  
ON :  
BASS  
This function is turned on.  
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE  
is a registered trademark of BBE  
Sound, inc.  
TREBLE  
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
24  
Using the TV's Menu  
TV SPEAKER:  
SPATIALIZER  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"  
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.  
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER  
modes.  
When this function is on, the TVs speaker  
does not shut off the sound even if head-  
phones are connected.  
If you set this function to off, the TVs speaker  
does not output the sound when the  
headphones are connected.  
You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode  
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.  
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "  
on page 9.  
OUTPUT:  
You can choose the sound from the MAIN-  
picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when  
using the headphones.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The TVs speaker does not put out the  
sound from the SUB-picture.  
SUPER BASS  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
The sound of the SUB-picture is mono  
only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II  
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
HEADPHONE  
This function enables you to output the TVs  
sound from your headphones.  
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then  
press MENU/OK button.  
HEADPHONE  
VOLUME  
TV SPEAKER  
OUTPUT  
05  
ON  
MAIN  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Use the  
and the  
/
/
button to select,  
button to set the  
HEADPHONE function. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
VOLUME :  
You can adjust the volume of the sound  
output from your headphones.  
25  
Using the TV's menu  
FEATURES menu  
BLUE BACK  
You can set the TV to automatically change  
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the  
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no  
input from an external device.  
FEATURES  
SLEEP TIMER  
BLUE BACK  
ON  
CHILD LOCK  
CHANNEL GUARD  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
OFF  
OFF  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
COMPONENT  
ON :  
OK  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
SLEEP TIMER  
You can set the TV to automatically turn off  
CHILD LOCK  
after a set time.  
You can disable the front control buttons of  
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the  
TV can be operated only by using the remoto  
control.  
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
Use this function to prevent children from  
operating the TV at their own discretion  
(without parent consent).  
SLEEP TIMER  
0
12  
0
OFF  
ON :  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to set the  
period of time.  
The TV begins count down from the set  
time.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
When there is a TV channel you do not want  
your children to watch, you can lock out the  
channel. Even when a child chooses a  
programme number for a locked out channel  
the screen will change to blue and display  
so the channel cannot be viewed.  
You can set the period of time a  
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10  
minitue steps.  
To cancel this function:  
Press the button to set a period of time to  
"OFF".  
To set this function  
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
press the number 0 (AV) button.  
The menu disappers.  
SET ID NO.  
0000  
One minute before this function turns off  
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.  
OK  
:OK  
This function cannot be used to turn off  
TV  
:EXIT  
the TV's main power.  
DISP  
:BACK  
When this function is on, you can display  
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm  
or change the remaining time.  
26  
Using the TV’s menu  
2 Set the ID number you want.  
To view a locked TV  
channel  
To choose a number:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
1 Choose a programme number in  
which a TV channel locked with  
the number buttons or PR LIST.  
To move a cursor:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
The screen changes to blue and the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH / CC  
5
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
You cannot choose a locked TV channel  
with the  
/
buttons.  
GUARD  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
2 Press the DISPLAY button to  
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber  
input screen).  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a TV channel.  
5
The TV shows the TV programme which  
the chosen TV channel is now  
broadcasting.  
ID NO.:  
3 Press the number buttons to  
enter the ID number.  
5 Press the blue button to set this  
function to the TV channel.  
The lock is temporarily released so you  
can view the TV channel.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the  
TV channel is locked.  
If you have forgotten the ID number:  
To cancel this function:  
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".  
After confirming the ID number, press the  
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.  
Press the blue button again.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and  
the lock is released.  
When you would like to cancel the  
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must  
perform the operation " To set this  
function" again.  
6 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
27  
Using the TV's menu  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are  
received for about 15 minutes or longer after  
the end of a broadcast.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not  
turn off the TV's main power.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a  
VIDEO mode.  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-  
ing to the video signal input from the external  
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If  
this setting is incorrect, images will not be  
displayed.  
VIDEO :  
If a normal video signal (composite video  
signal) is input.  
COMPONENT :  
B
R
If a Component video signal (Y/C /C  
signals) is input.  
For detailed connecting methods, see  
" Additional preparation " on page 36.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)  
only when the component video signal is  
input.  
28  
Using the TVs menu  
AUTO PROGRAM  
INSTALL menu  
CH  
10  
INSTALL  
20%  
LANGUAGE  
OK  
:OK  
AUTO PROGRAM  
EDIT/MANUAL  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
DISP  
:BACK  
OK  
:OK  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,  
TV  
:EXIT  
press the DISPLAY button.  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
LANGUAGE  
You can choose the language you want to  
use for the on-screen display from the  
language list in a menu.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press  
the MENU/OK button.  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL  
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"  
on page 30.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a language.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not  
stored in the programme numbers list,  
you can register it using the MANUAL  
function.  
The menu disappers.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page  
30.  
AUTO PROGRAM  
You can automatically register the TV  
channels which can be received well at  
your residence in the TV's programme  
numbers by performing the following.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not  
store a TV channel to the programme  
number 0 (AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/  
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK  
button to exit from the EDIT menu.  
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are  
automatically stored in the programme  
numbers list.  
29  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT:  
EDIT/MANUAL  
This function adds a new TV channel in the  
current programme numbers list by using the  
CH/CC number.  
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into  
two types:  
editing of the current programme numbers  
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a  
TV channel you want to view to the  
programme number (MANUAL function).  
DELETE :  
This function deletes a unnecessary TV  
Channel.  
MANUAL :  
CAUTION  
Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT  
function rewrites the current programme  
numbers list.  
Resultingly, the programme number of  
some of the TV channels will change.  
This function manually registers a new TV  
channel in a programme number.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
For programme number PR 0, "AV"  
appears in the programme numbers list.  
When a TV channel which has been  
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD  
function, using the MANUAL function for  
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL  
GUARD function.  
FUNCTIONS  
MOVE  
1 Press the  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the button to start the  
MOVE function.  
When a TV channel has already been  
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT  
function deletes the TV channel.  
/
buttons to  
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
EDIT  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
21  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
CC 01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
STORE  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
2 Follow the operation description  
of a function you want to use and  
operate the function.  
choose a new programe number.  
To cancel the MOVE function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
MOVE :  
This function changes a programme number  
of a TV channel.  
4 Press the button to change the  
programme number of a TV  
channel to a new programme  
number.  
ID :  
This function registers a Channel name (ID)  
to a TV channel.  
30  
Using the TVs menu  
ID  
MANUAL  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01(B/G)  
02  
03  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the red button to start the  
ID function.  
3 Enter a channel name (ID).  
OK  
:OK  
SEARCH+  
SEARCH-  
FINE+  
Press the  
/
buttons to  
TV  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
SYSTEM  
DISP  
choose a character.  
FINE-  
press the  
the cursor.  
EDIT  
/
buttons to move  
To cancel the MANUAL function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
3 Press the button to choose the  
system (sound system) for a TV  
channel you want to register.  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
For the sound systems in each country  
or region, see the table  
M
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page  
12.  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the green or red button to  
search for a TV channel.  
To cancel the ID function:  
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV  
channel. Then the TV channel is  
displayed.  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the MENU/OK button to  
register a channel name to a TV  
channel.  
5 Press the green or red button  
repeatedly until the to TV channel  
you want appears.  
DELETE  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
If the TV channel reception is poor:  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the yellow button to delete  
the TV channel.  
Press the bule or yerrow button to  
finetune the TV channel.  
If you cannot hear the normal sound  
even when the picture of the TV channel  
appers normally:  
The TV channel is deleted from the  
programme numbers list.  
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the  
button and choose a SYSTEM that has  
normal sound.  
MANUAL  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a programme number to  
which you want to register a new  
TV channel.  
6 Press the MENU/OK button and  
register the TV channel to a  
programme number.  
2 Press the bule button to activate  
the MANUAL function.  
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.  
At the right side following the CH/CC  
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of  
the TV channel appears.  
31  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT  
PREPARATION  
Find the CH/CC number corresponding  
to the channel number of the TV channel  
from the on page 33.  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a programme number for  
which you will register a new TV  
channel.  
2 Press the green button to start  
the INSERT function.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
**  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
`-9  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
CH/CC  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose "CC" or "CH" according  
to the CH/CC number of the TV  
channel.  
To cancel the INSERT function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the Number buttons to  
enter the remaining CH/CC  
number.  
The TV shifts to registration mode.  
When the registration is completed, the  
picture of the TV channel appears on the  
screen.  
The CH/CC number is a number  
indicating the broadcast frequency to the  
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV  
channel corresponding to the broadcast  
frequency indicated by the CH/CC  
number, a picture in the no-signal state  
appears.  
32  
Using the TVs menu  
CH/CC number  
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel  
number of the TV channel from this table.  
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.  
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.  
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.  
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.  
Channel  
Channel  
CH  
US  
CCIR  
E2  
OIRT  
R1  
AUSTRALIA  
AU-0  
AU-1  
AU-2  
AU-6  
AU-7  
AU-8  
AU-9  
CC  
US  
CCIR  
OIRT  
AUSTRALIA  
CH 02  
CH 03  
CH 04  
CH 05  
CH 06  
CH 07  
CH 08  
CH 09  
CH 10  
CH 11  
CH 12  
CH 13  
CH 14  
CH 15  
CH 16  
CH 17  
CH 18  
CH 19  
CH 20  
CH 21  
CH 22  
CH 23  
CH 24  
CH 25  
CH 26  
CH 27  
CH 28  
CH 29  
CH 30  
CH 31  
CH 32  
CH 33  
CH 34  
CH 35  
CH 36  
CH 37  
CH 38  
CH 39  
CH 40  
CH 41  
CH 42  
CH 43  
CH 44  
CH 45  
CH 46  
CH 47  
CH 48  
CH 49  
CH 50  
CH 51  
CH 52  
CH 53  
CH 54  
CH 55  
CH 56  
CH 57  
CH 58  
CH 59  
CH 60  
CH 61  
CH 62  
CH 63  
CH 64  
CH 65  
CH 66  
CH 67  
CH 68  
CH 69  
CH 70  
US-2  
CC 01  
CC 02  
CC 03  
CC 04  
CC 05  
CC 06  
CC 07  
CC 08  
CC 09  
CC 10  
CC 11  
CC 12  
CC 13  
CC 14  
CC 15  
CC 16  
CC 17  
CC 18  
CC 19  
CC 20  
CC 21  
CC 22  
CC 23  
CC 24  
CC 25  
CC 26  
CC 27  
CC 28  
CC 29  
CC 30  
CC 31  
CC 32  
CC 33  
CC 34  
CC 35  
CC 36  
CC 37  
CC 38  
CC 39  
CC 40  
CC 41  
CC 42  
CC 43  
CC 44  
CC 45  
CC 46  
CC 47  
CC 48  
CC 49  
CC 50  
CC 51  
CC 52  
CC 53  
CC 54  
CC 55  
CC 56  
CC 57  
CC 58  
CC 59  
CC 60  
CC 61  
CC 62  
CC 63  
CC 64  
CC 75  
CC 76  
CC 77  
CC 78  
CC 79  
CC 95  
CC 96  
CC 97  
CC 98  
CC 99  
S-1  
S-2  
AU-5  
US-3  
E3  
US-4  
E4  
R2  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
S-3  
US-5  
E5  
S-4  
US-6  
E6  
S-5  
US-7  
E7  
S-6  
AU-5A  
US-8  
E8  
S-7  
US-9  
E9  
S-8  
US-10  
US-11  
US-12  
US-13  
US-14  
US-15  
US-16  
US-17  
US-18  
US-19  
US-20  
US-21  
US-22  
US-23  
US-24  
US-25  
US-26  
US-27  
US-28  
US-29  
US-30  
US-31  
US-32  
US-33  
US-34  
US-35  
US-36  
US-37  
US-38  
US-39  
US-40  
US-41  
US-42  
US-43  
US-44  
US-45  
US-46  
US-47  
US-48  
US-49  
US-50  
US-51  
US-52  
US-53  
US-54  
US-55  
US-56  
US-57  
US-58  
US-59  
US-60  
US-61  
US-62  
US-63  
US-64  
US-65  
US-66  
US-67  
US-68  
US-69  
E10  
E11  
E12  
R10  
R11  
R12  
AU-10  
AU-11  
S-9  
S-10  
S-11  
S-12  
S-13  
S-14  
S-15  
S-16  
S-17  
S-18  
S-19  
S-20  
S-21  
S-22  
S-23  
S-24  
S-25  
S-26  
S-27  
S-28  
S-29  
S-30  
S-31  
S-32  
S-33  
S-34  
S-35  
S-36  
S-37  
S-38  
S-39  
S-40  
S-41  
A
B
C
D
E
F
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
E61  
E62  
E63  
E64  
E65  
E66  
E67  
E68  
E69  
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1  
W+2  
W+3  
W+4  
W+5  
W+6  
W+7  
W+8  
W+9  
W+10  
W+11  
W+12  
W+13  
W+14  
W+15  
W+16  
W+17  
W+18  
W+19  
W+20  
W+21  
W+22  
W+23  
W+24  
W+25  
W+26  
W+27  
W+28  
X
Y
Z
R3  
R4  
R5  
AU-3  
AU-4  
Z+1  
Z+2  
A-5  
A-4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
33  
Using the TV's menu  
Languages that are not included in the  
teletext language group that you select,  
the sub-titles of the teletext program will  
not be displayed properly.  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
There are 4 types of teletext language  
groups. Set the teletext language group that  
corresponds to the language of the teletext  
program that you want to watch.  
1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
GROUP-1  
GROUP-2  
GROUP-3  
GROUP-4  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
/
2 Press the  
buttons to  
choose a group.  
Group  
Languages  
Turkish, Hungarian, English,  
German, French, Italian,  
Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,  
Swedish, Finnish  
GROUP-1  
Polish, Serbian, Croatian,  
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,  
Rumanian, Hungarian,  
German, French, Italian,  
Swedish, Finnish  
GROUP-2  
Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,  
Lithuanian, Estonian,  
Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,  
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,  
English, German  
GROUP-3  
GROUP-4  
Arabic, Czech, Slovak.  
Hungarian, English, German,  
French, Italian, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
34  
Using the TV's menu  
DEMO menu  
DEMO  
ON  
OFF  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
The DEMO function automatically demo-  
strations some of the TV function.  
When the DEMO function is set to  
ON:  
Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-  
stration starts automatically.  
If you do not want that to happen, set the  
DEMO function to OFF.  
1 Press the  
choose ON.  
/
buttons to  
To cancel the DEMO function,  
choose off.  
2 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the settings.  
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the  
demostration will start.  
To stop the demonstration:  
Press one of the button on the remote  
control.  
35  
Additional preparation  
Connecting the external  
devices  
Connect the devices to the TV, paying  
attention to the following connection  
diagram.  
Before connecting anything:  
Read the manuals provided with the  
devices. Depending on the devices, the  
connection method may differ from the  
figure. In addition, the device settings  
may be changed depending on the  
connection method to secure proper  
operation.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Turn off all the devices including the TV.  
The "Specifications" on page 43 contains  
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you  
are connecting a device not listed in the  
following connection diagram, see the  
"Specifications" to choose the best  
VIDEO terminal.  
Note that connecting cables are not  
supplied.  
When connecting devices that are  
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see  
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported  
Devices" on page 38.  
AUDIO  
R
L/MONOVIDEO  
S
O
V
E
R
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
C
R
C
B
Y/VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
R
L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
L
UDIO  
VIDEO  
A
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCR (composite signal)  
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
VCR for recording (composite signal)  
DVD player (composite signal)  
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
DVD player (component video signals;  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
B
R
Y/C /C )  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
7
8
9
0
-
TV game (composite signal)  
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Camcorder (composite signal)  
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Headphones  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
A
AV COMPU LINK cable  
36  
Additional preparation  
In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack  
is indicated by "V".  
Connecting methods  
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack  
and the device's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack with a video  
cable.  
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks  
(L/MONO and R) and the  
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R  
output) jacks with an audio  
cable.  
If connecting a device to the TV  
with an S-VIDEO cabel :  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)  
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of  
connecting with a video cable.  
If the device's sound output is in  
mono :  
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and  
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.  
Note that the connection with a video cable  
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to  
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO  
cable.  
Connecting devices to the  
OUTPUT terminal  
The signals of the images and sound you are  
currently viewing with this TV are output  
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting  
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can  
record the currently shown image and sound  
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and  
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.  
If connecting a DVD player to the  
TV with a component video  
cable:  
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in  
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's  
COMPONENT (component video output)  
jacks with a component video cables,  
instead of connection with a video cable.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-  
NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on  
page 28.  
B
R
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the  
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's  
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with  
a video cable.  
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and  
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and  
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R  
input) jacks with an audio cable.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive video signal (525P signal).  
(When the component video signal is  
input.)  
If you have a DVD player that outputs  
Progressive video signals (525P) as a  
component video signal, then by  
attaching the device to the television with  
a component video cable you can see  
the actual images that are recorded on a  
DVD disc as an original image source.  
When you turn off the TV, the signals from  
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.  
The component signals input from the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot  
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.  
If connecting a device to the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal  
with a video cable:  
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the  
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with  
a video cables.  
Connecting Headphones  
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini  
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-  
phone jack at the TV front panel.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO  
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page  
28.  
37  
Additional preparation  
Connecting AV COMPU  
LINK Supported Devices  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a  
system in which related devices are  
automatically controlled when you operate  
one device.  
If you apply this system to the TV, you can  
have the TV automatically perform the  
required operations by operating one  
external device. You don't have to use the  
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or  
change the VIDEO modes.  
Conditions to use the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system  
A device equipped with an AV COMPU  
LINK terminal is required.  
You must connect the TV and the device  
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied  
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable  
is unavailable, connect them with a cable  
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at  
both ends.  
You must connect the device to an  
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up  
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system will not function  
correctly. For details, see Setting up the  
AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system.  
Examples of the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system operations  
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a  
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images  
from the device.  
The TV must be in standby mode (the  
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TVs  
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),  
the AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system does not function.  
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a  
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a  
VCR, you can view the tape.  
Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-  
iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in  
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed  
correctly.  
Setting up the AV COMPU  
LINK remote control system  
The performance of the AC COMPU  
LINK remote control system varies  
depending on the connected device.  
See the devices instruction manual.  
CAUTION:  
With some devices, the setup method  
differs from the ones explained here.  
Be sure to read the devices instruction  
manual thoroughly before setting it up.  
When you select "TV SOUND" as the  
input source with the AV Control  
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's  
MUTING function automatically operates  
and the sound from the TV's speakers is  
muted.  
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+  
buttons or the MUTING button on the  
TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-  
ING function. You can regain the sound  
from the TV's speakers.  
1 Connect the device to the TV’s  
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.  
If you want to connect a DVD  
player to the TV with a compo-  
nent video cable :  
Connect the DVD player to the TVs VIDEO-3  
terminal.  
For detailed connecting instructions, see  
"Connecting the external devices" on  
page 36.  
38  
Additional Preparation  
2 Connect the TVs AV COMPU  
LINK terminal and the devices  
AV COMPU LINK terminal with  
an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
3 Change the devices setting  
according to the VIDEO terminal  
it is connected to.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-1 terminal :  
Set the VCRs remote control code to A code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-1 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD2.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the VCRs remote control code to B code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD3.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a  
component video cable:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD1.  
For instructions on how to change the  
devices setting, refer to the devices  
instruction manual.  
If the device you are connecting has  
neither the remote control code nor the  
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it  
to the TVs VIDEO-1 terminal.  
39  
Troubleshooting  
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before  
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if  
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think  
there is a problem with the TV itself.  
Important:  
This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.  
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to  
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.  
After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the  
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -  
quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the  
rearcover of the TV.  
Has the TV and aerial been  
connected properly?  
Has the aerial cable been damaged?  
Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-  
ection?  
If you cannot turn on  
the TV  
Is the AC plug connected to the AC  
outlet?  
Is the aerial itself faulty?  
Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the  
If the TV or aerial receives interference  
from the other devices, stripes or noise  
may appear in the picture. Move such  
device as an amplifier, personal compu-  
ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-  
ference away from your TV, or try chan-  
ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-  
erference from a radio tower or high-  
voltage wire, please contact your local  
dealer.  
Main power button.  
No picture/No sound  
Have you chosen a TV channel whose  
reception is extremely bad? In this case,  
the BLUE BACK function will be activat-  
ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and  
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you  
want to view the TV channel, follow the  
description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to  
try to change the BLUE BACK function  
setting to OFF.  
If the TV receives interferences from  
signal reflecting from mountains or  
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will  
occur.  
Try to change the aerials direction or  
replace the antenna with the one with  
better directionality.  
Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct?  
Forrow the description SOUND SYSTEM  
Buttonon page 12 to try to solve the  
trouble.  
Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct? Follow the  
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"  
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.  
Poor picture  
If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-  
ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have  
trouble. Check the following to try to  
solve the trouble :  
Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-  
ed properly? Follow the description  
"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
Videotaping teletext is not recommended  
because it may not record correctly.  
40  
Troubleshooting  
When a white and bright still image (su-  
ch as a white dress) is displayed on the  
screen, the white part may look as if it  
were coloured.  
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to  
the nature of the picture tube itself, and  
not due to a TV failure.  
When the picture disappears from the  
screen, the unnatural colours will also  
disappear.  
When you are viewing a teletext progra-  
mme, you cannot operate the menus.  
Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the  
teletext programme to the ordinary TV  
programme to try operating the menus.  
Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?  
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,  
you cannot operate the TV with the front  
control buttons of the TV. Follow the  
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to  
try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.  
When viewing images from commercially  
available video softwear products, or vi-  
deos from videotapes which have been  
recored improperly, the top of the image  
may be distored.  
If the TV operation becomes disabled  
suddenly, press the Main power button  
on the TV and turn off the main power.  
Try to press the Main power button again  
to turn on the main power. If the TV  
returns to a normal state, it is not a  
failure.  
This is due to the condition of the video  
signal, and not because of malfunction.  
Poor sound  
The following functions do not operate  
when receiving Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal);  
Remote control function:  
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and  
STROBE BUTTON  
MENU function:  
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure  
and ZOOM  
Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE  
properly? If not, follow the description  
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
When the TV channel reception is poor, it  
can be hard to hear the stereo or  
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the  
description "STEREO / I II" on page 24  
to hear the sound more easily by  
Other concerns  
changing it to a mono sound.  
When the SLEEP TIMER function or  
AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the  
TV is automatically turned off.  
Operation disabled  
Have the batteries of the remote control  
become exhausted?  
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to  
press the POWER button to turn on the  
TV once again. At this time, if the TV  
resumes a normal state, there is no  
problem.  
Follow the description "Putting the  
Batteries into the Remote Control" on  
page 4 and replace them with new  
batteries to try solve the problem.  
If you do not want sound emitted from  
the TVs speakers when using  
headphones, change the TV SPEAKER  
setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.  
For details, see HEADPHONEon page  
25.  
Have you attempted to use the remote  
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at  
a location more than seven meters apart  
from the TV location? Operate the remote  
control in the front of your TV or a  
location less than seven meters from  
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.  
41  
Troubleshooting  
If you bring a magnetised device such  
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture  
may be warped or unnatural colours  
appear at the corners of the screen.  
In this case, keep the device apart from  
your TV. If the speaker causes such  
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded  
speaker instead.  
A picture may be tilted due to the influe-  
nce of the earth's magnetism. In this  
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page  
23 to complete the tilt.  
It takes a short period of time from the  
time an operation such as changing  
channels is performed until an image is  
displayed. This is not a malfunction.  
This is the time required for the image to  
stabilize before it can be displayed.  
The TV may emit a crackling sound due  
to a sudden change in temperature. It  
does not matter if a picture or sound  
does not show any abnormality. If you  
hear crackling sounds frequently while  
you are viewing the TV, other causes may  
be assumed.  
For precautionary purposes, request  
your service technician to inspect it.  
Touching the screen may cause you feel  
a slight electric shock due to its static  
electricity.  
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to  
the construction of the picture tube. It is  
not a problem with the TV.  
You can rest assured that this static dis-  
charge does not have harmful influence  
over the human boby.  
42  
Specifications  
Broadcasting systems  
Colour systems  
Channels and frequencies  
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M  
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz  
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz  
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz  
UHF channel (U)  
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz  
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),  
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).  
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system  
FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)  
Please see the table in the description  
"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34  
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz  
Sound-multiplex systems  
Teletext systems  
Lauguages displayed by  
teletext  
Power requirements  
Audio output  
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W  
VIDEO-1 terminal  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-2 terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.  
RCA connector X 5  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal  
B
R
Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio  
L/R inputs are available.  
Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-4 terminal  
OUTPUT terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.  
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)  
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)  
Headphone jack  
Accessories  
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2  
Speakers  
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W  
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W  
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm  
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm  
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm  
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm  
HV-34LPZ : 75kg  
Power consumption  
Screen size  
(measured diagonally)  
Dimensions(W X H X D)  
Weight  
HV-29LPZ : 48kg  
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.  
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any  
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent  
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of  
copyright.  
This TV does not conform to the PAL-D Chinese broadcasting system.  
43  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
COLOUR TELEVISION  
HV-34LPZ  
HV-29LPZ  
Contents  
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6  
Remote control buttons  
and functions . . . 8  
Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 18  
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 19  
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 22  
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LCT1217-001A-H  
0402-Ki-NV-JMT  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.  
To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this  
manual thoroughly before you begin.  
WARNING:  
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-  
ANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
CAUTION:  
TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING  
RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.  
1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.  
2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,  
grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.  
3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.  
Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.  
When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more  
than the minimum distances as shown.  
15 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
15 cm  
4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.  
5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.  
Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.  
6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it  
when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,  
wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.  
Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.  
7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to  
disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.  
2
Setting up your TV  
CAUTION  
Turn off all the epuipment including the TV  
before connecting anything.  
1
Connecting the aerial and VCR  
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good  
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.  
Fig.A  
• Read the manual that came with the VCR  
before connecting.  
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :  
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket  
on this TV .  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :  
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial  
input socket on the VCR, and  
connect the VCR and TV with  
another aerial cable.  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack and the TV's  
VIDEO jack with a video cable.  
AV COMPULINK  
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO  
cable:  
Fig.B  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-  
VIDEO cable A , instead of connecting with a  
video cable.  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
A
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's  
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with  
an audio cable.  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect  
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack  
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an  
audio cable.  
You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if  
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.  
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK  
Supported Devices” on page 35.  
3
Setting up your TV  
2 Connecting the power cord  
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.  
3 Putting the batteries into the  
Remote control  
Use two AA/R6 batteries.  
Insert the batteries from the  
end, making sure the  
and polaritiles are correct.  
Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.  
If the remote control does not work properly,  
replace the batteries.  
The batteries we supply are only for setting up  
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon  
as necessary.  
4 Making the initial settings  
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial  
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.  
1 Press the main power button on the TV  
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.  
If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does  
not change to green, your TV is in the standby  
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote  
control to turn the TV on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has  
already been turned before .In this case,use  
the "LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM"  
functions to make the initial settings. For details,  
see "INSTALL menu" on page 27.  
POWER lamp  
Main power button  
2 Press the MENU/OK button  
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose  
a language for the on-screen language.  
LANGUAGE  
OK  
:OK  
TV :EXIT  
DISP. :BACK  
4
Setting up your TV  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to choose  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are automatically  
stored in the programme numbers list.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
AUTO PROGRAM  
CH  
10  
7
20%  
RETURN  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,  
press the DISPLAY button.  
MUTING  
4 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number (PR)  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
EDIT  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PIP  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in  
the programme numbers list, you can register  
it using the MANUAL function.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store  
a TV channel to the programme number 0  
(AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL  
function, press the MENU/OK button to close  
the EDIT menu.  
Now, the setting up is complete.  
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!  
5
TV buttons and functions  
Turn the main power on  
Press the main power button 1 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is  
in the standby mode.  
To turn the main power off :  
press the main power button again.  
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.  
Turn the TV on from standby  
mode  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and  
your TV will be turned on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
You can also turn on the TV by pressing the  
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby  
mode.  
8 2  
7
Choose a TV channel  
1
9
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Choose a VIDEO terminal  
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or  
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Adjust the volume  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .  
The volume level indicater appears.  
MENU button 6  
Press to open the menu.  
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on  
the TV" on page 17.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Remote control sensor  
and ECO sensor 9  
0
-
6 5 4 3  
ECO lamp 7  
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.  
6
TV buttons and functions  
SPATIALIZER lamp 8  
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO  
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.  
Headphone jack 0  
Connect the headphones with a stereo  
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).  
When using the headphones, follow the  
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 23.  
A
UDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
A
UDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
L
/
M
O
N
O
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
VIDEO-1 terminal =  
See page 3 and 33.  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-2 terminal ~  
See page 33.  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
=
~
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDLI/OMONO  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal !  
!
@
OUTPUT  
See page 26 and 33.  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPU LINK  
VIDEO-4 terminal -  
See page 33.  
$
#
OUTPUT terminal @  
See page 33.  
Aerial socket #  
Connect the aerial cable.  
See page 3.  
AV COMPU LINK terminal $  
See page 33 and 35.  
7
Remote control buttons and functions  
Turn the TV on from standby mode  
Press the POWER button.  
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be  
turned on.  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MODE  
You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To turn the TV off:  
Press the POWER button again.  
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV  
enters standby mode.  
7
RETURN  
Choose a TV channel  
MULTI  
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has  
been set.  
MUTING  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the  
programme number (PR) with the number  
buttons.  
If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,  
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry  
system.  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For  
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.  
MENU/  
OK  
If you do not have a clear picture or no colour  
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR  
SYSTEM button" on page 11.  
If you cannot hear sound normally even when the  
picture appears normally, follow the operation  
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
Adjust the volume  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.  
You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.  
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 23.  
8
Remote control buttons and functions  
16:9  
Watch images from external  
devices  
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external  
device has been connected.  
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3  
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-  
pect ratio).  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the  
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.  
To return to a TV channel:  
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect  
ratio that have been squeezed into a  
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you  
can restore their original demensions.  
MUTING button  
Press the MUTING button to turn off  
the volume. Pressing the MUTING  
button again resumes the previous  
volume level.  
SPATIALIZER button  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a  
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER  
function.  
Press the SPATIALIZER button to  
choose a mode.  
ZOOM button  
You can change the screen size according to the  
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one  
from the following ZOOM modes.  
LIVE :  
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo  
sound converting it into surround sound  
with added depth and ambience.  
Press the ZOOM button to choose a  
mode.  
MONO :  
If you press the ZOOM button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen and  
the ZOOM function does not operate.  
Mono allows you to enjoy normal  
monaural sound by converting it into a  
stereo-like sound.  
OFF :  
REGULAR  
This function is turned off.  
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as  
its original size is.  
The LIVE mode works properly only  
with stereo sound.  
The LIVE mode does not work  
correctly with headphones.  
The MONO mode works properly only  
with monaural sound.  
ZOOM  
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect  
ratio) to fill the TV screen.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The left side and right side of the Wide  
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.  
9
Remote control buttons and functions  
To register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
BASS button  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
Choose the Programme number to which  
the channel you want to register has been  
set, and press the RETURN+ button and  
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.  
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is  
displayed and the registration is com-  
pleted.  
Press the BASS button to turn the  
SUPER BASS function on or off.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
To cancel register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
while viewing any TV channel, press the  
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3  
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS  
CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-  
ration is cancelled.  
PICTURE MODE button  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to  
adjust the picture settings automatically.  
When you turn off the TV, the  
registration for the "Return Channel" is  
cancelled.  
Press the PICTURE MODE button  
choose a mode.  
If you want to view the "Return Channel"  
and another TV channel alternately, first  
choose a channel other than the  
"Return Channel". and then press the  
RETURN+ button to change the  
channel to the "Return Channel" In this  
way, you can view two channels  
alternately by pressing the RETURN+  
button.  
BRIGHT :  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
STANDARD :  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
SOFT :  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
RETURN function :  
The TV temporarily memorises the TV  
channel that was choosen right before the  
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".  
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can  
alternately view the current TV channel and  
the "Last Channel".  
RETURN+ button  
The RETURN+ button has two functions;  
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN  
function. If a channel has been registerd as  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+  
function operates. If there is no setting for  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN  
function operates.  
If you want to view two channels  
alternately by using the RETURN  
function, first choose one TV channel  
and then choose the other TV channel  
with the Number buttons. If you choose  
the TV channel without using the  
Number buttons, there are cases where  
a channel other than the one you first  
chose is registered as the "Last  
Channel".  
RETURN+ function :  
By registering a channel you frequently  
view as the "Return Channel", you can  
select that channel at any time simply by  
pressing the RETURN+ button.  
10  
Remote control buttons and functions  
/ button  
Choose a TV channel or a  
VIDEO terminal  
1 Press the DISPLAY button to  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
display the PR LIST.  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons  
to choose a programme number  
or VIDEO terminal.  
Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
Press the  
choose a sound mode.  
/ button to  
For programme numbers with the  
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed  
next to the programme number in the PR  
LIST.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
The VIDEO terminals are registered after  
the programme number PR99.  
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
COLOUR SYSTEM button  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button  
to choose the appropriate colour  
system.  
DISPLAY button  
You can display the PR LIST, programme  
number or VIDEO terminal number on the  
screen.  
AUTO :  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
Press the DISPLAY button changes the  
display as follows:  
This function detects a colour system from  
the input signal.  
The AUTO mode may not function  
properly if you have poor signal quality.  
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO  
mode, choose another colour system  
manually.  
PR LIST  
PR  
ID  
1
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
The AUTO mode detects a colour system  
from the input signal and chooses the  
appropiate colour system automatically.  
No indication  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of  
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour  
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15  
for details.  
-10  
+10  
11  
Remote control buttons and functions  
For the colour systems in each  
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS  
For sound sysytem colour system in your country  
or rigion, refer to the table below.  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
SOUND SYSTEM button  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
The sound system is chosen automati-  
cally. However, if you cannot hear the  
sound normally even when the picture  
appears normally, chooes the sound  
system maunually.  
PAL  
Asia,  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
PAL  
PAL  
Middle  
East  
Press the SOUND SYSTEM  
button to choose the appropriate  
sound system.  
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
SECAM  
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
NTSC  
SECAM  
PAL  
Russia, etc  
B/G : B/G system  
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
I
: I system  
PAL  
D/K : D/K system  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
M
: M system  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
Africa  
This function does not work in the  
Nigeria, etc  
PAL  
VIDEO mode.  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
SECAM  
For the sound systems in each  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
SOUND SYSTEM  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
B/G  
Asia,  
Middle  
East  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
D/K  
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
B/G  
M
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
Russia, etc  
D/K  
D/K  
B/G  
I
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
B/G  
I
Africa  
Nigeria, etc  
B/G  
B/G  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
12  
Remote control buttons and functions  
If you press the STROBE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the screen  
and the STROBE function does not operate.  
FREEZE button  
You can view the Main picture's forzen image  
as the SUB-picture.  
Press the FREEZE button.  
You cannot change the TINT setting for  
the still images on the screen even if you  
are viewing a programme with NTSC  
colour system.  
Still pictures  
MAIN  
Using the MULTI  
function  
To cancel the FREEZE function :  
Press the FREEZE button again.  
You can display multi-pictures that enable  
you to easily find a program you want to  
view.  
You cannot use the FREEZE button when  
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are  
displayed on the screen.  
1 Press the MULTI button.  
If you press the FREEZE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the FREEZE function does  
not operate.  
Press the MULTI button changes the  
display as follow:  
5-pictures multi mode  
2
1
Still  
pictures  
3
4
STROBE button  
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15  
consecutive still images.  
MAIN  
Moving  
picture  
5
Press the STROBE button.  
16-pictures multi mode  
1
2
4
3
Still  
pictures  
5
6
8
7
Moving  
picture  
9
10  
14  
12  
16  
11  
15  
Moving  
picture  
5
13  
To cancel the STROBE function:  
Press the STROBE button to return to the  
MAIN-picture.  
Cancel the MULTI function  
If signal level of the MAIN-picture is  
weak, the still images become abnormal.  
To display next Multi pictures :  
Press the NEXT button.  
You cannot use the STROBE button  
when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-  
picture are displayed on the screen.  
13  
Remote control buttons and functions  
2 Choose the desired picture with  
Using the PIP function  
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at  
the  
/
and  
/
buttons, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
the same time.  
The screen switches to the TV channel or  
VIDEO mode of your choice.  
Press the PIP button.  
Press the PIP button changes the display as  
follows:  
Any programme numbers to which no TV  
channel has been registered, or  
programme numbers to which  
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not  
displayed.  
Twin pictures mode  
2
5
You cannot perform menu operations  
such as headphone volume adjustment.  
Cancel the MULTI function once to  
perform menu operations.  
MAIN  
SUB  
If you press the MULTI button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the MULTI function does not  
operate.  
Picture in picture mode  
2
SUB  
5
MAIN  
During the short period that is required  
for the Multi-pictures display to close no  
sound comes from the television.  
Cancel the PIP function  
You cannot view a picture from the same  
programme number (or the same VIDEO  
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and  
the SUB-picture at the same time.  
If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the  
quality of the SUB-picture may also be  
poor.  
If the picture standards of both pictures  
are different, the top and bottom or one of  
them may be missing.  
The ZOOM function does not operate  
when viewing pictures using the PIP  
function.  
The SUB-picture cannot be output from  
TV.  
If you press the PIP button when receiving  
the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen  
and the PIP function does not operate.  
14  
Remote control buttons and functions  
You cannot change the COLOUR SYSTEM  
of the SUB-picture using the COLOUR  
SYSTEM button on the remote control.  
Choose a TV channel for  
the SUB-picture  
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.  
POSITION button  
You can adjust the position of the SUB-  
Picture when using the Picture in picture  
mode.  
Listen to the sound of SUB-  
picture  
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on  
your headphones while listening to the sound  
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.  
Press the POSITION button  
repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the SUB-  
Picture moves counterclockwise.  
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.  
Change the colour system  
of the SUB-picture  
1 While the SUB-picture is dis-  
played, press the MENU/OK  
button to display the MENU  
(main manu).  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons  
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,  
and then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
SWAP button  
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the  
SUB-picture with each other.  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
Press the SWAP button.  
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
MAIN  
SUB  
NTSC 3.58  
AUTO  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
Do not press the SWAP button while you  
are recording the TV output on the VCR.  
If you do, the output signal will change.  
4 Press the  
choose SUB, and then press the  
buttons to choose the  
/
buttons to  
/
appropriate colour system. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
15  
Using the TV's menu  
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.  
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating  
techniques fully.  
Basic operation  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display  
PICTURE  
MODE  
the MENU (main menu).  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
MENU  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
PICTURE SETTING  
PICTURE FEATURES  
SOUND SETTING  
FEATURES  
INSTALL  
DEMO  
6
9
7
OK  
:OK  
RETURN  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
The display appearing at the bottom of a menu  
indicates buttons on the remote control you  
can use when you operate a chosen function.  
MUTING  
MENU/OK button  
TV/VIDEO button  
DISPLAY button  
OK  
TV  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
DISP.  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons to  
choose a menu title, and press the  
MENU/OK button.  
The menu appears.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
To return to the previous menu:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
To exit a menu instantly:  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
3 Press the  
function.  
/
buttons to choose a  
For details of the functions in the menus, see  
the following pages.  
16  
Using the TV's menu  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose the setting of that func-  
tion.  
If you want to operate a function which  
appears only with its name, follow the  
descriptions of that function on the  
following pages.  
5 Press the MENU/OK button to  
comple the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
When watching the television with the  
NTSC system, the menus are displayed  
at about half of their normal verical size.  
Operation with the  
buttons on the TV  
You can also operate the menus using the  
buttons on the front panel of the TV.  
OK  
button  
TV/VIDEO  
button  
/
/
buttons  
buttons  
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
There is no button on the front panel of  
the TV that has the function of the  
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.  
17  
Using the TV's menu  
PICTURE SETTING menu  
SHARP  
You can adjust the picture sharpness.  
PICTURE SETTING  
: softer  
: sharper  
PICTURE MODE  
CONTRAST  
STANDARD  
BRIGHT  
SHARP  
COLOUR  
You cannot select the SHARP function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
TINT  
WHITE BALANCE  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
MID  
ON  
OK  
:OK  
RESET  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
COLOUR  
You can adjust the picture colour.  
: lighter  
: deeper  
PICTURE MODE  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs to adjust the picture settings  
automatically.  
TINT  
You can adjust the picture tint.  
: reddish  
BRIGHT:  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
: greenish  
STANDARD:  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
You can change the TINT setting (picture  
tint) only when the colour system is  
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.  
SOFT:  
You cannot select the TINT function when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal).  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
You can also operate the PICTURE  
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE  
button on the remote control.  
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"  
on page 10.  
To return to the default settings  
in each PICTURE MODE :  
Press the blue button. Returns the picture  
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE  
MODE mode to the default settings, and  
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.  
Adjusting the picture  
You can change the picture settings of each  
picture mode as you like. The picture settings  
changed are stored in the picture mode.  
WHITE BALANCE  
You can select one of three WHITE  
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to  
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since  
white is the colour which is used as a  
refernce for all the other colours, changing  
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the  
appearance of all the other colours on the  
screen.  
CONTRAST  
You can adjust the picture contrast.  
: lower  
: higer  
BRIGHT  
You can adjust the picture brighetness.  
: darker  
: brighter  
COOL:  
A bluish white. Using this mode when  
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy  
a more vivid and bright picture.  
18  
Using the TV's menu  
MID:  
PICTURE FEATURES menu  
The normal white colour.  
PICTURE FEATURES  
WARM:  
DIGITAL VNR  
DigiPure  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
PULL DOWN  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
ZOOM  
A raddish white. Using this mode when  
watching films allows you to enjoy colours  
that are characteristic of films.  
PICTIRE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE  
function in the Twin pictures mode or the  
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.  
DISP  
:BACK  
DIGITAL VNR  
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-  
matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the  
brightness of your room. This reduces eye  
strain for you and the power consumption of  
the TV.  
amount of noise in the original picture.  
You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR  
function when receiving the Progressive  
Video Signal (525P signal).  
AUTO:  
The TV will be automatically adjust the level  
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the  
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the  
best possible picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too  
high it can make the picture less sharp.  
It is recommended to use the AUTO  
setting if you can.  
DISPLAY :  
This function is turned on. Further, clover  
marks indicating the brightness of your  
room are displayed for several seconds each  
time the brightness changes. The number of  
clover marks displayed on the screen  
MAX:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,  
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.  
increases as your room becomes darker.  
The MAX setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
MIN:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness  
of the original picture has not been repro-  
duced fully, change the setting from AUTO to  
MIN.  
The MIN setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
19  
Using the TV's menu  
MIN:  
DigiPure  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function  
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the  
setting from AUTO to MIN.  
The Digipure function uses the latest in  
digital technology to give you a natural  
looking picture. The Digipure function  
includes the following two functions.  
• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain very little  
noise.  
Digipure function:  
This function helps to create a natural looking  
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges  
from high-contrast and crisp images.  
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,  
edges are added to produce a sharper, more  
detailed picture.  
OFF:  
The DigiPure function is turned off.  
PULL DOWN  
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema  
film picture more smoothly and naturally on  
the screen.  
You can choose from the DigiPure function  
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.  
Picture motion compensation  
function:  
This function displays fast-moving pictures  
(for example, the players or ball in a football  
game) more smoothly and naturally on the  
screen.  
AUTO:  
This function is turned on. Normally keep this  
function set to AUTO.  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
You cannot select the Digipure function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
• The motion may appear unnatural when  
viewing images with the NTSC colour  
system. To make the motion smoother,  
switch the PULL DOWN function from  
AUTO to OFF.  
AUTO:  
The TV will automatically adjust the level of  
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of  
noise in the picture, giving the best possible  
picture.  
You cannot select this function in the  
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in  
picture mode.  
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on  
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of  
noise, this may actually make the noise  
worse. It is recommended to use the  
AUTO setting if you can.  
MAX:  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to  
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality  
has not been reproduced fully, change the  
setting from AUTO to MAX.  
• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
20  
Using the TV's menu  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
ZOOM  
You can change the screen size according to  
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum  
one of three ZOOM modes.  
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the  
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
MENU/OK button.  
ZOOM  
REGULAR  
ZOOM  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
16:9  
PAL  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a ZOOM mode. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The picture expands and the chosen  
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5  
seconds.  
choose the appropriate colour  
system. Then press the MENU/  
OK button.  
When changing to the COLOUR  
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see  
"Change the colour system of the SUB-  
picture" on page 15 for details.  
You can choose a ZOOM mode from  
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For  
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.  
You can also operate the COLOUR  
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR  
SYSTEM button on the remote control.  
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM  
button" on page 11.  
You cannot select the ZOOM function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
PICTURE TILT  
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic  
force may make the picture tilt. If this  
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.  
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
PICTURE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons until the  
picture becomes level. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
21  
Using the TV's menu  
SOUND SETTING menu  
BALANCE  
You can adjust the volume balance between  
the left and right speakers.  
SOUND SETTING  
MONO  
STEREO/  
BASS  
TREBLE  
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.  
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.  
BALANCE  
AI VOLUME  
BBE  
SPATIALIZER  
SUPER BASS  
HEADPHONE  
ON  
ON  
LIVE  
ON  
AI VOLUME  
OK  
:OK  
You can prevent the sudden increase or  
decrease of sound that occurs when  
changing the channel to another channel or  
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO  
mode.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
STEREO / I•II  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and  
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.  
For example, you can set it to be OFF in  
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.  
If you set the AI VOLUME function while  
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,  
the setting is registered as the setting for  
VIDEO mode.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate  
as expected if the sound input level from  
a broadcast station (or video software) is  
extremely low.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
BBE  
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-  
to-listen sound that is faithful to the original  
sound recorded.  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound to your liking.  
ON :  
BASS  
This function is turned on.  
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE  
is a registered trademark of BBE  
Sound, inc.  
TREBLE  
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
22  
Using the TV's Menu  
TV SPEAKER:  
SPATIALIZER  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"  
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.  
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER  
modes.  
When this function is on, the TVs speaker  
does not shut off the sound even if head-  
phones are connected.  
If you set this function to off, the TVs speaker  
does not output the sound when the  
headphones are connected.  
You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode  
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.  
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "  
on page 9.  
OUTPUT:  
You can choose the sound from the MAIN-  
picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when  
using the headphones.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The TVs speaker does not put out the  
sound from the SUB-picture.  
SUPER BASS  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
The sound of the SUB-picture is mono  
only. You cannot use the STEREO / I II  
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
HEADPHONE  
This function enables you to output the TVs  
sound from your headphones.  
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then  
press MENU/OK button.  
HEADPHONE  
VOLUME  
TV SPEAKER  
OUTPUT  
05  
ON  
MAIN  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Use the  
and the  
/
/
button to select,  
button to set the  
HEADPHONE function. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
VOLUME :  
You can adjust the volume of the sound  
output from your headphones.  
23  
Using the TV's menu  
FEATURES menu  
BLUE BACK  
You can set the TV to automatically change  
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the  
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no  
input from an external device.  
FEATURES  
SLEEP TIMER  
BLUE BACK  
ON  
CHILD LOCK  
CHANNEL GUARD  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
OFF  
OFF  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
COMPONENT  
ON :  
OK  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
SLEEP TIMER  
You can set the TV to automatically turn off  
after a set time.  
CHILD LOCK  
You can disable the front control buttons of  
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the  
TV can be operated only by using the remoto  
control.  
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
Use this function to prevent children from  
operating the TV at their own discretion  
(without parent consent).  
SLEEP TIMER  
0
12  
0
OFF  
ON :  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to set the  
period of time.  
The TV begins count down from the set  
time.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
When there is a TV channel you do not want  
your children to watch, you can lock out the  
channel. Even when a child chooses a  
programme number for a locked out channel  
the screen will change to blue and display  
so the channel cannot be viewed.  
You can set the period of time a  
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10  
minitue steps.  
To cancel this function:  
Press the button to set a period of time to  
"OFF".  
To set this function  
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
press the number 0 (AV) button.  
The menu disappers.  
SET ID NO.  
0000  
One minute before this function turns off  
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.  
OK  
:OK  
This function cannot be used to turn off  
the TV's main power.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
When this function is on, you can display  
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm  
or change the remaining time.  
24  
Using the TV’s menu  
2 Set the ID number you want.  
To view a locked TV  
channel  
To choose a number:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
1 Choose a programme number in  
which a TV channel locked with  
the number buttons or PR LIST.  
To move a cursor:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
The screen changes to blue and the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH / CC  
5
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
You cannot choose a locked TV channel  
with the  
/
buttons.  
GUARD  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
2 Press the DISPLAY button to  
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber  
input screen).  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a TV channel.  
5
The TV shows the TV programme which  
the chosen TV channel is now  
broadcasting.  
ID NO.:  
3 Press the number buttons to  
enter the ID number.  
5 Press the blue button to set this  
function to the TV channel.  
The lock is temporarily released so you  
can view the TV channel.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the  
TV channel is locked.  
If you have forgotten the ID number:  
To cancel this function:  
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".  
After confirming the ID number, press the  
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.  
Press the blue button again.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and  
the lock is released.  
When you would like to cancel the  
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must  
perform the operation " To set this  
function" again.  
6 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
25  
Using the TV's menu  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are  
received for about 15 minutes or longer after  
the end of a broadcast.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not  
turn off the TV's main power.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a  
VIDEO mode.  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-  
ing to the video signal input from the external  
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If  
this setting is incorrect, images will not be  
displayed.  
VIDEO :  
If a normal video signal (composite video  
signal) is input.  
COMPONENT :  
If a Component video signal (Y/CB/CR  
signals) is input.  
For detailed connecting methods, see  
" Additional preparation " on page 33.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)  
only when the component video signal is  
input.  
26  
Using the TVs menu  
AUTO PROGRAM  
INSTALL menu  
CH  
10  
INSTALL  
20%  
LANGUAGE  
AUTO PROGRAM  
EDIT/MANUAL  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
OK  
:OK  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,  
TV  
:EXIT  
press the DISPLAY button.  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
LANGUAGE  
You can choose the language you want to  
use for the on-screen display from the  
language list in a menu.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press  
the MENU/OK button.  
LANGUAGE  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
OK  
:OK  
TV :EXIT  
DISP. :BACK  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL  
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"  
on page 28.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a language.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not  
stored in the programme numbers list,  
you can register it using the MANUAL  
function.  
The menu disappers.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page  
28.  
AUTO PROGRAM  
You can automatically register the TV  
channels which can be received well at  
your residence in the TV's programme  
numbers by performing the following.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not  
store a TV channel to the programme  
number 0 (AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/  
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK  
button to exit from the EDIT menu.  
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are  
automatically stored in the programme  
numbers list.  
27  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT:  
EDIT/MANUAL  
This function adds a new TV channel in the  
current programme numbers list by using the  
CH/CC number.  
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into  
two types:  
editing of the current programme numbers  
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a  
TV channel you want to view to the  
programme number (MANUAL function).  
DELETE :  
This function deletes a unnecessary TV  
Channel.  
MANUAL :  
CAUTION  
Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT  
function rewrites the current programme  
numbers list.  
Resultingly, the programme number of  
some of the TV channels will change.  
This function manually registers a new TV  
channel in a programme number.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
For programme number PR 0, "AV"  
appears in the programme numbers list.  
When a TV channel which has been  
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD  
function, using the MANUAL function for  
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL  
GUARD function.  
FUNCTIONS  
MOVE  
1 Press the  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the button to start the  
MOVE function.  
When a TV channel has already been  
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT  
function deletes the TV channel.  
/
buttons to  
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
EDIT  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
21  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
CC 01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
STORE  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
2 Follow the operation description  
of a function you want to use and  
operate the function.  
choose a new programme  
number.  
To cancel the MOVE function:  
MOVE :  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
This function changes a programme number  
of a TV channel.  
4 Press the button to change the  
programme number of a TV  
channel to a new programme  
number.  
ID :  
This function registers a Channel name (ID)  
to a TV channel.  
28  
Using the TVs menu  
ID  
MANUAL  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01(B/G)  
02  
03  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the red button to start the  
ID function.  
3 Enter a channel name (ID).  
OK  
:OK  
SEARCH+  
SEARCH-  
FINE+  
Press the  
/
buttons to  
TV  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
SYSTEM  
DISP  
choose a character.  
FINE-  
press the  
the cursor.  
EDIT  
/
buttons to move  
To cancel the MANUAL function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
3 Press the button to choose the  
system (sound system) for a TV  
channel you want to register.  
For the sound systems in each country or  
region, see the table "BROADCASTING  
SYSTEMS" on page 12.  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
M
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the green or red button to  
search for a TV channel.  
To cancel the ID function:  
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV  
channel. Then the TV channel is  
displayed.  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the MENU/OK button to  
register a channel name to a TV  
channel.  
5 Press the green or red button  
repeatedly until the to TV channel  
you want appears.  
DELETE  
1 Press the  
If the TV channel reception is poor:  
/
buttons to  
Press the bule or yerrow button to  
finetune the TV channel.  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the yellow button to delete  
the TV channel.  
If you cannot hear the normal sound  
even when the picture of the TV channel  
appers normally:  
The TV channel is deleted from the  
programme numbers list.  
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the  
button and choose a SYSTEM that has  
normal sound.  
MANUAL  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
6 Press the MENU/OK button and  
register the TV channel to a  
programme number.  
choose a programme number to  
which you want to register a new  
TV channel.  
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.  
2 Press the bule button to activate  
the MANUAL function.  
At the right side following the CH/CC  
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of  
the TV channel appears.  
29  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT  
PREPARATION  
Find the CH/CC number corresponding  
to the channel number of the TV channel  
from the on page 31.  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a programme number for  
which you will register a new TV  
channel.  
2 Press the green button to start  
the INSERT function.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
**  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
`-9  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
CH/CC  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose "CC" or "CH" according  
to the CH/CC number of the TV  
channel.  
To cancel the INSERT function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the Number buttons to  
enter the remaining CH/CC  
number.  
The TV shifts to registration mode.  
When the registration is completed, the  
picture of the TV channel appears on the  
screen.  
The CH/CC number is a number  
indicating the broadcast frequency to the  
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV  
channel corresponding to the broadcast  
frequency indicated by the CH/CC  
number, a picture in the no-signal state  
appears.  
30  
Using the TVs menu  
CH/CC number  
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 30, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel  
number of the TV channel from this table.  
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.  
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.  
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.  
CHINA: The CHINA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in china, etc.  
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.  
Channel  
OIRT  
Channel  
OIRT  
R1  
CC  
US  
CCIR  
S-1  
CHINA  
AUSTRALLIA  
CC  
US  
CCIR  
E2  
CHINA  
DS-1  
DS-2  
DS-3  
DS-7  
DS-8  
DS-9  
AUSTRALLIA  
AU-0  
AU-1  
AU-2  
AU-6  
AU-7  
AU-8  
AU-9  
CC 01  
CC 02  
CC 03  
CC 04  
CC 05  
CC 06  
CC 07  
CC 08  
CC 09  
CC 10  
CC 11  
CC 12  
CC 13  
CC 14  
CC 15  
CC 16  
CC 17  
CC 18  
CC 19  
CC 20  
CC 21  
CC 22  
CC 23  
CC 24  
CC 25  
CC 26  
CC 27  
CC 28  
CC 29  
CC 30  
CC 31  
CC 32  
CC 33  
CC 34  
CC 35  
CC 36  
CC 37  
CC 38  
CC 39  
CC 40  
CC 41  
CC 42  
CC 43  
CC 44  
CC 45  
CC 46  
CC 47  
CC 48  
CC 49  
CC 50  
CC 51  
CC 52  
CC 53  
CC 54  
CC 55  
CC 56  
CC 57  
CC 58  
CC 59  
CC 60  
CC 61  
CC 62  
CC 63  
CC 64  
CC 75  
CC 76  
CC 77  
CC 78  
CC 79  
CC 95  
CC 96  
CC 97  
CC 98  
CC 99  
AU-5  
CH 02  
CH 03  
CH 04  
CH 05  
CH 06  
CH 07  
CH 08  
CH 09  
CH 10  
CH 11  
CH 12  
CH 13  
CH 14  
CH 15  
CH 16  
CH 17  
CH 18  
CH 19  
CH 20  
CH 21  
CH 22  
CH 23  
CH 24  
CH 25  
CH 26  
CH 27  
CH 28  
CH 29  
CH 30  
CH 31  
CH 32  
CH 33  
CH 34  
CH 35  
CH 36  
CH 37  
CH 38  
CH 39  
CH 40  
CH 41  
CH 42  
CH 43  
CH 44  
CH 45  
CH 46  
CH 47  
CH 48  
CH 49  
CH 50  
CH 51  
CH 52  
CH 53  
CH 54  
CH 55  
CH 56  
CH 57  
CH 58  
CH 59  
CH 60  
CH 61  
CH 62  
CH 63  
CH 64  
CH 65  
CH 66  
CH 67  
CH 68  
CH 69  
CH 70  
US-2  
S-2  
Z-1  
Z-2  
Z-3  
Z-4  
US-3  
E3  
S-3  
US-4  
E4  
R2  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
S-4  
US-5  
E5  
S-5  
US-6  
E6  
S-6  
AU-5A  
US-7  
E7  
S-7  
Z-5  
Z-6  
Z-7  
DS-6  
Z-9  
Z-10  
Z-11  
US-8  
E8  
S-8  
US-9  
E9  
DS-10  
DS-11  
DS-12  
Z-8  
S-9  
US-10  
US-11  
US-12  
US-13  
US-14  
US-15  
US-16  
US-17  
US-18  
US-19  
US-20  
US-21  
US-22  
US-23  
US-24  
US-25  
US-26  
US-27  
US-28  
US-29  
US-30  
US-31  
US-32  
US-33  
US-34  
US-35  
US-36  
US-37  
US-38  
US-39  
US-40  
US-41  
US-42  
US-43  
US-44  
US-45  
US-46  
US-47  
US-48  
US-49  
US-50  
US-51  
US-52  
US-53  
US-54  
US-55  
US-56  
US-57  
US-58  
US-59  
US-60  
US-61  
US-62  
US-63  
US-64  
US-65  
US-66  
US-67  
US-68  
US-69  
E10  
E11  
E12  
R10  
R11  
R12  
AU-10  
AU-11  
S-10  
S-11  
S-12  
S-13  
S-14  
S-15  
S-16  
S-17  
S-18  
S-19  
S-20  
S-21  
S-22  
S-23  
S-24  
S-25  
S-26  
S-27  
S-28  
S-29  
S-30  
S-31  
S-32  
S-33  
S-34  
S-35  
S-36  
S-37  
S-38  
S-39  
S-40  
S-41  
A
B
Z-12  
Z-13  
Z-14  
Z-15  
Z-16  
Z-17  
Z-18  
Z-19  
Z-20  
Z-21  
Z-22  
Z-23  
Z-24  
Z-25  
Z-26  
Z-27  
Z-28  
Z-29  
Z-30  
Z-31  
Z-32  
Z-33  
Z-34  
Z-35  
Z-36  
Z-37  
C
D
E
F
G
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
E61  
E62  
E63  
E64  
E65  
E66  
E67  
E68  
E69  
DS-13  
DS-14  
DS-15  
DS-16  
DS-17  
DS-18  
DS-19  
DS-20  
DS-21  
DS-22  
DS-23  
DS-24  
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1  
W+2  
W+3  
W+4  
W+5  
W+6  
W+7  
W+8  
W+9  
W+10  
W+11  
W+12  
W+13  
W+14  
W+15  
W+16  
W+17  
W+18  
W+19  
W+20  
W+21  
W+22  
W+23  
W+24  
W+25  
W+26  
W+27  
W+28  
DS-25  
DS-26  
DS-27  
DS-28  
DS-29  
DS-30  
DS-31  
DS-32  
DS-33  
DS-34  
DS-35  
DS-36  
DS-37  
DS-38  
DS-39  
DS-40  
DS-41  
DS-42  
DS-43  
DS-44  
DS-45  
DS-46  
DS-47  
DS-48  
DS-49  
DS-50  
DS-51  
DS-52  
DS-53  
DS-54  
DS-55  
DS-56  
DS-57  
X
Y
Z
Z+1  
Z+2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
DS-4  
DS-5  
AU-3  
AU-4  
A-5  
A-4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
31  
Using the TV's menu  
DEMO menu  
DEMO  
ON  
OFF  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
The DEMO function automatically demo-  
strations some of the TV function.  
When the DEMO function is set to  
ON:  
Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-  
stration starts automatically.  
If you do not want that to happen, set the  
DEMO function to OFF.  
1 Press the  
choose ON.  
/
buttons to  
To cancel the DEMO function,  
choose off.  
2 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the settings.  
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the  
demostration will start.  
To stop the demonstration:  
Press one of the button on the remote  
control.  
32  
Additional preparation  
Connecting the external  
devices  
Connect the devices to the TV, paying  
attention to the following connection  
diagram.  
Before connecting anything:  
Read the manuals provided with the  
devices. Depending on the devices, the  
connection method may differ from the  
figure. In addition, the device settings  
may be changed depending on the  
connection method to secure proper  
operation.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Turn off all the devices including the TV.  
The "Specifications" on page 40 contains  
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you  
are connecting a device not listed in the  
following connection diagram, see the  
"Specifications" to choose the best  
VIDEO terminal.  
Note that connecting cables are not  
supplied.  
When connecting devices that are  
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see  
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported  
Devices" on page 35.  
AUDIO  
R
L/MONOVIDEO  
S
O
V
E
R
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
C
R
C
B
Y/VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
R
L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
L
UDIO  
VIDEO  
A
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCR (composite signal)  
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
VCR for recording (composite signal)  
DVD player (composite signal)  
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
DVD player (component video signals;  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
Y/CB/CR  
)
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
7
8
9
0
-
TV game (composite signal)  
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Camcorder (composite signal)  
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Headphones  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
A
AV COMPU LINK cable  
33  
Additional preparation  
In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack  
is indicated by "V".  
Connecting methods  
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack  
and the device's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack with a video  
cable.  
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks  
(L/MONO and R) and the  
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R  
output) jacks with an audio  
cable.  
If connecting a device to the TV  
with an S-VIDEO cabel :  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)  
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of  
connecting with a video cable.  
If the device's sound output is in  
mono :  
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and  
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.  
Note that the connection with a video cable  
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to  
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO  
cable.  
Connecting devices to the  
OUTPUT terminal  
The signals of the images and sound you are  
currently viewing with this TV are output  
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting  
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can  
record the currently shown image and sound  
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and  
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.  
If connecting a DVD player to the  
TV with a component video  
cable :  
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in  
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's  
COMPONENT (component video output)  
jacks with a component video cables,  
instead of connection with a video cable.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-  
NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on  
page 26.  
B
R
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the  
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's  
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with  
a video cable.  
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and  
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and  
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R  
input) jacks with an audio cable.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive video signal (525P signal).  
(When the component video signal is  
input.)  
If you have a DVD player that outputs  
Progressive video signals (525P) as a  
component video signal, then by  
attaching the device to the television with  
a component video cable you can see  
the actual images that are recorded on a  
DVD disc as an original image source.  
When you turn off the TV, the signals from  
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.  
The component signals input from the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot  
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.  
If connecting a device to the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal  
with a video cable :  
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the  
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with  
a video cables.  
Connecting Headphones  
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini  
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-  
phone jack at the TV front panel.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO  
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page  
26.  
34  
Additional preparation  
Connecting AV COMPU  
LINK Supported Devices  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a  
system in which related devices are  
automatically controlled when you operate  
one device.  
Conditions to use the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system  
A device equipped with an AV COMPU  
LINK terminal is required.  
You must connect the TV and the device  
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied  
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable  
is unavailable, connect them with a cable  
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at  
both ends.  
If you apply this system to the TV, you can  
have the TV automatically perform the  
required operations by operating one  
external device. You don't have to use the  
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or  
change the VIDEO modes.  
You must connect the device to an  
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up  
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system will not function  
correctly. For details, see Setting up the  
AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system.  
Examples of the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system operations  
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a  
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images  
from the device.  
The TV must be in standby mode (the  
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TVs  
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),  
the AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system does not function.  
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a  
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a  
VCR, you can view the tape.  
Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-  
iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in  
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed  
correctly.  
Setting up the AV COMPU  
LINK remote control system  
The performance of the AV COMPU  
LINK remote control system varies  
depending on the connected device.  
See the devices instruction manual.  
CAUTION:  
With some devices, the setup method  
differs from the ones explained here.  
Be sure to read the devices instruction  
manual thoroughly before setting it up.  
When you select "TV SOUND" as the  
input source with the AV Control  
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's  
MUTING function automatically operates  
and the sound from the TV's speakers is  
muted.  
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+  
buttons or the MUTING button on the  
TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-  
ING function. You can regain the sound  
from the TV's speakers.  
1 Connect the device to the TV’s  
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.  
If you want to connect a DVD  
player to the TV with a compo-  
nent video cable :  
Connect the DVD player to the TVs VIDEO-3  
terminal.  
For detailed connecting instructions, see  
"Connecting the external devices" on  
page 33.  
35  
Additional Preparation  
2 Connect the TVs AV COMPU  
LINK terminal and the devices  
AV COMPU LINK terminal with  
an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
3 Change the devices setting  
according to the VIDEO terminal  
it is connected to.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-1 terminal :  
Set the VCRs remote control code to A code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-1 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD2.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the VCRs remote control code to B code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD3.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a  
component video cable:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD1.  
For instructions on how to change the  
devices setting, refer to the devices  
instruction manual.  
If the device you are connecting has  
neither the remote control code nor the  
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it  
to the TVs VIDEO-1 terminal.  
36  
Troubleshooting  
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before  
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if  
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think  
there is a problem with the TV itself.  
Important:  
This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.  
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to  
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.  
After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the  
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -  
quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the  
rearcover of the TV.  
If you cannot turn on  
the TV  
Is the AC plug connected to the AC  
outlet?  
Poor picture  
If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-  
ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have  
trouble. Check the following to try to  
solve the trouble :  
Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the  
Main power button.  
Has the TV and aerial been  
connected properly?  
Has the aerial cable been damaged?  
Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-  
ection?  
No picture/No sound  
Have you chosen a TV channel whose  
reception is extremely bad? In this case,  
the BLUE BACK function will be activat-  
ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and  
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you  
want to view the TV channel, follow the  
description "BLUE BACK" on page 24 to  
try to change the BLUE BACK function  
setting to OFF.  
Is the aerial itself faulty?  
If the TV or aerial receives interference  
from the other devices, stripes or noise  
may appear in the picture. Move such  
device as an amplifier, personal compu-  
ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-  
ference away from your TV, or try chan-  
ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-  
erference from a radio tower or high-  
voltage wire, please contact your local  
dealer.  
Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct?  
Forrow the description SOUND SYSTEM  
Buttonon page 12 to try to solve the  
trouble.  
If the TV receives interferences from  
signal reflecting from mountains or  
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will  
occur.  
Try to change the aerials direction or  
replace the antenna with the one with  
better directionality.  
37  
Troubleshooting  
Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct? Follow the  
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"  
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.  
Have you attempted to use the remote  
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at  
a location more than seven meters apart  
from the TV location? Operate the remote  
control in the front of your TV or a  
Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-  
ed properly? Follow the description  
"Adjusting the picture" on page 18 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
location less than seven meters from  
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.  
Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?  
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,  
you cannot operate the TV with the front  
control buttons of the TV. Follow the  
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 24  
to try to set the CHILD LOCK function to  
OFF.  
When a white and bright still image (su-  
ch as a white dress) is displayed on the  
screen, the white part may look as if it  
were coloured.  
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to  
the nature of the picture tube itself, and  
not due to a TV failure.  
When the picture disappears from the  
screen, the unnatural colours will also  
disappear.  
If the TV operation becomes disabled  
suddenly, press the Main power button  
on the TV and turn off the main power.  
Try to press the Main power button again  
to turn on the main power. If the TV  
returns to a normal state, it is not a  
failure.  
When viewing images from commercially  
available video softwear products, or vi-  
deos from videotapes which have been  
recored improperly, the top of the image  
may be distored.  
The following functions do not operate  
when receiving Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal);  
Remote control function:  
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and  
STROBE BUTTON  
MENU function:  
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure  
and ZOOM  
This is due to the condition of the video  
signal, and not because of malfunction.  
Poor sound  
Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE  
properly? If not, follow the description  
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 22 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
When the TV channel reception is poor, it  
can be hard to hear the stereo or  
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the  
description "STEREO / I II" on page 22  
to hear the sound more easily by  
changing it to a mono sound.  
Operation disabled  
Have the batteries of the remote control  
become exhausted?  
Follow the description "Putting the  
Batteries into the Remote Control" on  
page 4 and replace them with new  
batteries to try solve the problem.  
38  
Troubleshooting  
Touching the screen may cause you feel  
a slight electric shock due to its static  
electricity.  
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to  
the construction of the picture tube. It is  
not a problem with the TV.  
You can rest assured that this static dis-  
charge does not have harmful influence  
over the human boby.  
Other concerns  
When the SLEEP TIMER function or AUTO  
SHUTOFF function operates, the TV is  
automatically turned off.  
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to press  
the POWER button to turn on the TV once  
again. At this time, if the TV resumes a  
normal state, there is no problem.  
If you do not want sound emitted from the  
TVs speakers when using headphones,  
change the TV SPEAKER setting in the  
HEADPHONE menu to OFF. For details,  
see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.  
If you bring a magnetised device such  
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture  
may be warped or unnatural colours  
appear at the corners of the screen.  
In this case, keep the device apart from  
your TV. If the speaker causes such  
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded  
speaker instead.  
A picture may be tilted due to the influe-  
nce of the earth's magnetism. In this  
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page  
21 to complete the tilt.  
It takes a short period of time from the  
time an operation such as changing  
channels is performed until an image is  
displayed. This is not a malfunction.  
This is the time required for the image to  
stabilize before it can be displayed.  
The TV may emit a crackling sound due  
to a sudden change in temperature. It  
does not matter if a picture or sound  
does not show any abnormality. If you  
hear crackling sounds frequently while  
you are viewing the TV, other causes may  
be assumed.  
For precautionary purposes, request  
your service technician to inspect it.  
39  
Specifications  
Broadcasting systems  
Colour systems  
Channels and frequencies  
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M  
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz  
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz  
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz  
UHF channel (U)  
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz  
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),  
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).  
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system  
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz  
Sound-multiplex systems  
Power requirements  
Audio output  
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W  
VIDEO-1 terminal  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-2 terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.  
RCA connector X 5  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal  
B
R
Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio  
L/R inputs are available.  
Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-4 terminal  
OUTPUT terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.  
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)  
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C215)  
Headphone jack  
Accessories  
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2  
Speakers  
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W  
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W  
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm  
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm  
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm  
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm  
HV-34LPZ : 75kg  
Power consumption  
Screen size  
(measured diagonally)  
Dimensions(W X H X D)  
Weight  
HV-29LPZ : 48kg  
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.  
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any  
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent  
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of  
copyright.  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
40  
HV-34LPZ  
HV-29LPZ  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
LCT1217-001A-H  
0402-Ki-NV-JMT  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
非常感謝您惠購此JVC牌彩色電視機。  
請在使用前熟讀此使用說明書,以掌握新電視機的使用方法。  
警告  
為了防止發生火災或觸電的危險,請勿將本機曝露於雨中或受潮。  
注意:  
為了保證人身安全,請遵守下列有關使用本機的注意事項。  
1 僅在電視機背面所示的電源範圍內使用。  
2 防止損壞電源線和插頭。從電視機上拔下插頭時,請抓住插頭,勿拉電  
源線。  
3 切勿堵塞或遮蓋通風口。  
切勿將本機放置在通風不良之處。  
安裝電視機時,在電視機周圍應留有大於圖示的最小距離的空間,以便  
通風。  
15 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
15 cm  
4 請勿讓物體或液體進入本機的縫隙內。  
5 本機發生故障時,請拔下插頭,讓維修服務人員修理。  
請勿自行維修或拆下後蓋。  
6 電視屏幕的表面易於損壞。操作電視機時請多加小心。如果電視屏幕弄  
髒時,請用乾的軟布擦拭。切勿用力摩擦。切勿使用任何清潔劑或去垢  
劑。  
7 長期不使用電視機時,請務必將電源插頭從交流電源插座上撥下。  
2
安裝電視機  
注意  
連接前,請關閉包括本機在內的所有設備。  
1 連接天線和錄像機  
未附帶天線。請使用優質的75歐姆同軸線。  
連接前,請閱讀錄像機的使用說明書。  
A  
如果不連接VCR(錄像機參照圖A:  
請將天線與電視機的天線插座連接。  
如果連接VCR參照圖B:  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
1 將天線與VCR的天線輸入插座連接,  
並用另一根天線連接VCR和電視機。  
2 用視頻電纜將VCRVIDEO OUT  
(視頻輸出)插口和電視機的VIDEO  
(視頻)插口連接起來。  
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)電纜連接VCR和電視  
機時:  
AV COMPULINK  
S-VIDEO電纜A來代替視頻電纜,將VCR的  
S-VIDEO OUT(超級-視頻輸出)接口與電視機  
S接口連接起來。  
B  
3 用音頻電纜將VCRVIDEO OUT  
(音頻L/R輸出)插口和電視機的  
AUDIO(音頻)插口(L/MONO和  
R)連接起來。  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
A
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
如果VCR的音頻輸出為單聲道時,請用音頻  
電纜將VCRAUDIO OUT(音頻輸出)插口  
和電視機的AUDIO L/MONO插口連接起來。  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
如果VCR帶有AV COMPU LINK端子,則可  
使用AV COMPU LINK功能。詳細說明,請  
參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV COMPU  
LINK的裝置”。  
3
安裝電視機  
2 連接電源線  
將插頭插入交流電源插座。  
3 將電池裝入遙控器  
請使用兩節AA/R6/5號電池。  
從負.極裝入電池,請勿搞錯正,極和負.極。  
請遵守印刷在電池上的警告事項。  
如果遙控器工作不正常,請更換電池。  
附帶的電池僅供安裝和測試電視機之用,請盡  
快換上新電池。  
4 初始設定  
首次打開電視機時,將進入初始設定模式,顯示  
JVC標記。  
1 按下電視機上的主電源按鈕。  
打開電視機,顯示JVC標記。  
如果電視機上的電源指示燈保持紅色而不變成  
綠色,則說明電視機處在待機狀態。請按下遙  
控器上的POWER按鈕來打開電視機。  
如果不出現JVC標記,則說明電視機已被打開  
過。此時,請利用“語言”和“自動程序”功  
能進行初始設定。詳細說明,請參閱第27頁  
上的“導入菜單”。  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
2 按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
出現語言菜單。可選擇用於在屏幕上顯示的語  
POWER指示燈  
言。  
主電源按鈕  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
4
安裝電視機  
3 按下  
/
按鈕,選擇中文。然後按  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
MENU/OK按鈕。  
自動程序功能啟動。  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
接收到的電視頻道被自動登錄在節目號碼一覽  
內。  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
CH  
10  
20%  
7
OK  
:
:
RETURN  
DISP.  
MULTI  
要取消自動程序功能時,請按下DISPLAY按  
鈕。  
MUTING  
4 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼(编排)  
一覽內後,出現编缉菜單。  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
CH/CC  
AV  
PIP  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一覽。詳  
細說明,請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。  
如果想觀看的電視頻道未被存儲在節目號碼一  
覽內,請利用手動功能將其登錄。詳細說明請  
參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。  
自動程序功能不會將電視頻道存儲在節目號碼  
0AV)內。  
如果無需使用編輯/手動功能時,請按下  
MENU/OK按鈕,關閉編輯菜單。  
安裝結束,請欣賞新的JVC電視機。  
5
電視機按鈕和功能  
打開主電源  
按下主電源按鈕 1。  
POWER指示燈 2 亮紅燈,電視機變為待機模  
式。  
關閉主電源:  
再次按下主電源按鈕。  
POWER指示燈 2 熄滅。  
從待機模式打開電視機  
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。  
POWER指示燈 2 從紅色變為綠色,電視機被  
打開。  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
在待機模式時,按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 也  
可打開電視機。  
選擇電視頻道  
8 2  
7
1
9
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。  
選擇視頻端子  
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 CHANNEL  
m 按鈕 5。  
調節音量  
按下VOLUME m 按鈕 4。  
出現音量水準指示器。  
MENU按鈕 6  
按下可打開菜單。  
(蓋板後面)  
詳細說明,請參閱第17頁上的“用電視機上的  
按鈕進行操作”。  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
IN (VIDEO-4)  
遙控器電子眼和ECO電子眼 9  
ECO指示燈 7  
如果將數字ECO電子眼功能設為開或顯示,則  
0
-
6 5 4 3  
ECO指示燈將亮燈。  
SPATIALIZER指示燈 8  
如果將環繞控制鍵功能設為單聲道現場,則  
SPATIALIZER指示燈將亮燈。  
6
電視機按鈕和功能  
耳機插口 0  
將耳機與立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)相  
連。  
使用耳機時,請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的  
步驟操作。  
VIDEO-1端子 =  
請參閱第3頁和第33頁。  
A
UDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
UDIO  
R A L/MONO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
VIDEO-2端子 ~  
請參閱第33頁。  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
端子 !  
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
=
~
請參閱第26頁和第33頁。  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDLI/OMONO  
!
@
VIDEO-4端子 -  
請參閱第33頁。  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPU LINK  
OUTPUT端子 @  
請參閱第33頁。  
$
#
天線插座 #  
連接天線。  
請參閱第3頁。  
AV COMPU LINK端子 $  
請參閱第33頁和第35頁。  
7
遙控器按鈕和功能  
從待機模式打開電視機  
按下POWER按鈕。  
POWER指示燈從紅色變為綠色,電視機被打開。  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按  
鈕也可從待機模式打開電視機。  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
關閉電視機:  
再次按下POWER按鈕。  
POWER指示燈從綠色變為紅色,電視機進入待機模式。  
7
RETURN  
選擇電視頻道  
選擇已設定電視頻道的節目號碼。  
MULTI  
按下CHANNEL m 按鈕或用數字按鈕輸入節  
目號碼(编排)。  
MUTING  
如要將兩位數輸入電視機,請按下-/--按鈕,改為兩位  
數輸入系統。  
可從編排一覽中選擇頻道。詳細說明,請參閱第11頁  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
上的“DISPLAY(顯示)按鈕”。  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
如果畫面不清晰或無色彩時,請按照第11頁上的  
COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色制式)按鈕”的步驟操  
作。  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
如果即使正常顯示圖像,也不能正常聽見聲音時,請  
按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM(聲音制式)按  
鈕”的步驟操作。  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
調節音量  
按下VOLUME m 按鈕。  
不可調節耳機的音量。請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的  
操作步驟操作。  
觀看來自外接裝置的圖像  
選擇連接著外接裝置的VIDEO端子。  
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。  
可用CHANNEL m 按鈕或從編排一覽選擇VIDEO端  
子。  
調回電視頻道:  
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按鈕。  
8
遙控器按鈕和功能  
16:9  
MUTING(靜音)按鈕  
此模式將普通畫面(4:3縱橫比)轉變為  
寬屏幕畫面(16:9縱橫比)。  
按下MUTING按鈕,關閉音量。再次按  
MUTING按鈕,可恢復至原先的音  
量。  
ZOOM(鏡頭)按鈕  
可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請從下列鏡頭  
模式中選擇最合適的一個。  
用於被壓縮成普通畫面(4:3縱橫比)  
16:9縱橫比的畫面時,可恢復原來  
尺寸。  
按下ZOOM按鈕,選擇一個模式。  
如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時按下ZOOM按鈕,則會在屏幕上顯示  
525P”,鏡頭功能不起作用。  
SPATIALIZER(環繞控制  
鍵)按鈕  
常规  
利用環繞控制鍵功能,可欣賞帶有“現  
用於以原有尺寸觀看普通圖像(4:3縱橫比)。  
場”效果的環繞聲音。  
按下SPATIALIZER按鈕,選擇模  
式。  
现场:  
利用現場模式,可欣賞被轉換成帶有深度  
和周圍環境的環繞聲音的普通立體聲。  
镜头  
可將寬屏幕圖像(16:9縱橫比)充滿電視屏幕。  
单声道:  
利用單聲道模式,可欣賞被轉換成像立體  
聲的普通單聲。  
:  
環繞控制鍵功能不工作。  
寬屏幕圖像(16:9縱橫比)的左側和右側將被  
去掉。  
現場模式僅在立體聲時正常工作。  
使用耳機時,現場模式不能正常工  
作。  
單聲道模式僅在單聲時正常工作。  
SPATIALIZER係經Desper  
Products,Inc.公司授權製造。  
9
遙控器按鈕和功能  
將電視頻道登錄為“調回頻道”:  
選擇已設定節目號碼的需登錄頻道的節目  
號碼,並持續按住RETURN+按鈕3秒鐘  
以上。將顯示“快退已設定!”,登錄結  
束。  
BASS(低音)按鈕  
利用超重低音(超重低音回聲)功能,可  
欣賞強勁有力的低音。  
按下BASS按鈕,打開或關閉超重  
低音功能。  
取消“調回頻道”的登錄:  
觀看任一電視頻道時,持續按住RETURN+  
按鈕3秒鐘以上。將顯快退已取消,  
登錄被取消。  
:  
打開此功能。  
:  
關閉電視機時,“調回頻道”的登錄被  
取消。  
關閉此功能。  
如想交替觀看“調回頻道”和另一電視  
頻道,請先選擇不是“調回頻道”的頻  
道,然後按下RETURN+按鈕,將頻道  
轉換為“調回頻道”。用這一方法,僅  
需按下RETURN+按鈕,便可交替觀看  
兩個頻道。  
PICTURE MODE(畫面模  
式)按鈕  
可選擇三種畫面模式(三種畫面設定)中  
的一種,自動調節畫面設定。  
頻道調回功能:  
按下PICTURE MODE按鈕,選擇  
模式。  
電視機將當前電視頻道前選擇的電視頻道  
作為“最後頻道”暫時記憶下來。按下  
RETURN+按鈕,可交替觀看當前電視頻  
道和“最後頻道”。  
亮度:  
增強對比度和銳度。  
如想利用頻道調回功能交替觀看兩個頻  
道,請先選擇一個電視頻道,然後用數  
字按鈕選擇另一個電視頻道。如未用數  
字按鈕選擇電視頻道,則有可能不是將  
您先選擇的頻道登錄為“最後頻道”。  
普通:  
標準畫面調節。  
柔和:  
使對比度和銳度變得柔和。  
RETURN頻道調回)  
按鈕  
RETURN+按鈕具有兩個功能:頻道調回  
+功能和頻道調回功能。如果某個頻道被  
登錄為“調回頻道”,則頻道調回+功能  
起作用。如未設定“調回頻道”,則頻道  
調回功能起作用。  
頻道調回+功能:  
將經常觀看的頻道登錄為“調回頻道”,  
可在任何時候僅需按下RETURN+按鈕,  
就可選擇此頻道。  
10  
遙控器按鈕和功能  
/ 按鈕  
選擇電視頻道或視頻端子  
觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時,可從雙重語  
言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)或雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音  
Ⅱ)中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不  
理想時,可將立體聲改變為單聲,以便更清  
楚地收聽廣播。  
1 按下DISPLAY按鈕,顯示编排一  
。  
2 按下  
/
目號碼或視頻端子。  
/
按鈕,選擇節  
然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
對於設有頻道鎖定功能的節目號碼,則會  
編排一覽中的節目號碼旁顯示 (頻道  
鎖定)標記。  
按下  
式。  
/ 按鈕,選擇聲音模  
: 立體聲  
視頻端子登錄在節目號碼編排 99之後。  
: 單聲  
: 雙重語言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)  
: 雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音Ⅱ)  
COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色制  
式)按鈕  
單聲道 取消多聲道功能,聲音變成單聲  
自動選擇彩色制式。但是,如果圖像不清晰  
或無色彩,請手動選擇彩色制式。  
道。  
可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。  
按下COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕,選  
擇合適的彩色制式。  
在視頻模式時,此功能不起作用。  
自动:  
DISPLAY(顯示)按鈕  
可在屏幕上顯示編排一覽、節目號碼或視頻  
此功能從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式。  
端子號碼。  
如果信號品質不佳,則自動功能可能不能  
正常發揮作用。如在自動功能時畫面不理  
想,請手動選擇其他彩色制式。  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
按下DISPLAY按鈕,如下所示地變換顯示:  
自動模式從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式,並  
自動選擇合適的彩色制式。  
需改變子畫面的彩色制式時,請參閱第  
15頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”的  
詳細說明。  
1
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
有關各國或各地區的彩色制式,請參閱第  
12頁上的“廣播制式”。  
OK  
:
TV  
:
+10  
-10  
11  
遙控器按鈕和功能  
SOUND SYSTEM(聲音制  
式)按鈕  
廣播制式  
有關所在國家或地區的聲音制式和彩色制  
式,請參閱下表。  
自動選擇聲音制式。但是,當畫面正常而卻  
不能正常地收聽聲音時,請手動選擇聲音制  
式。  
按下SOUND SYSTEM按鈕,選擇  
合適的聲音制式。  
PAL  
B/G B/G制式  
PAL  
PAL  
I
I制式  
SECAM  
D/K D/K制式  
NTSC  
SECAM  
PAL  
M
M制式  
在視頻模式時此功能不起作用。  
PAL  
有關各國或各地區的聲音制式,請參閱  
12頁上的“廣播制式”。  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
SECAM  
B/G  
D/K  
I
B/G  
M
D/K  
D/K  
B/G  
I
B/G  
I
B/G  
B/G  
12  
遙控器按鈕和功能  
如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P  
信號)時按下STROBE按鈕,則會在屏幕  
上顯示“525P”,頻閃功能不起作用。  
FREEZE(畫面暫停)按鈕  
可像子畫面一樣觀看主畫面的暫停圖像。  
按下FREEZE按鈕。  
即使是觀看NTSC彩色制式的節目,也不  
能改變對屏幕上的靜態圖像的色彩微調  
設定。  
使用多畫面功能  
可顯示多個畫面,以便易於找到所需觀看的  
節目。  
取消畫面暫停功能:  
再次按下FREEZE按鈕。  
1 按下MULTI按鈕。  
按下MULTI按鈕,如下所示地改變顯  
示。  
當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時,不  
可使用FREEZE按鈕。  
如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P  
信號)時按下FREEZE按鈕,則會在屏幕  
上顯示“525P”,畫面暫停功能不起作  
用。  
5
2
1
3
4
5
STROBE(頻閃)按鈕  
可以15張連續的靜止圖像方式觀看主畫面。  
按下STROBE按鈕。  
16  
1
5
2
4
8
3
7
6
9
10  
14  
12  
16  
11  
15  
5
13  
取消頻閃功能:  
按下STROBE按鈕,回到主畫面。  
如果主畫面的信號水準較弱,則靜止圖  
像不正常。  
顯示下一個多畫面:  
按下NEXT按鈕。  
當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時,不  
可使用STROBE按鈕。  
13  
遙控器按鈕和功能  
2 用  
使PIP功能  
可同時觀看兩個畫面(主畫面和子畫面)。  
/
/
按鈕,選擇所需  
畫面,然後按下MENU/OK按  
鈕。  
按下PIP按鈕。  
屏幕跳至所選的電視頻道或視頻模式。  
按下PIP按鈕,如下所示地改變顯示:  
不顯示未登錄電視頻道的節目號碼或設  
頻道鎖定的節目號碼。  
不能進行耳機音量調節等菜單操作。請  
先取消多畫面功能後,再進行菜單操  
作。  
2
5
如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P  
信號)時按下MULTI按鈕,則會在屏幕  
上顯示“525P”,多畫面功能不起作  
用。  
2
關閉多畫面顯示的一瞬間,電視機不發  
出聲音。  
5
PIP  
不可同時從主畫面和子畫面觀看同一節  
目號碼(或同一視頻端子)的圖像。  
如果主畫面信號不佳,則子畫面的信號  
品質可能也較差。  
如果兩個畫面的畫面標準不同,則頂部  
和底部或其中之一可能會沒有。  
PIP功能觀看畫面時,鏡頭功能不起作  
用。  
不能從電視機輸出子畫面。  
如果在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P  
信號)時按下PIP按鈕,則會在屏幕上顯  
示“525P”,PIP功能不起作用。  
14  
遙控器按鈕和功能  
為子畫面選擇電視頻道  
POSITION(位置)按鈕  
利用畫中畫模式時,可調節子畫面的位置。  
按下SUB-P m 按鈕。  
反復按下POSITION按鈕。  
每按一次POSITION按鈕,子畫面按逆時針  
方向移動一次。  
收聽子畫面的聲音  
在收聽機內揚聲器發出的主畫面的聲音的同  
時,可用耳機收聽子畫面的聲音。  
詳細說明,請參閱第23頁上的“耳機”。  
改變子畫面的彩色制式  
1 顯示子畫面時,按下MENU/OK按  
鈕,顯示菜单(主菜單)。  
2 按下  
特征,然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
3 按下 按鈕,選擇彩色制式,然  
/
/
按鈕,選擇画面  
SWAP(交換)按鈕  
可將主畫面和子畫面互換。  
/
後按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
按下SWAP按鈕。  
NTSC 3.58  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
4 按下  
按下  
/
/
按鈕,選擇子画面,然後  
按鈕,選擇合適的彩色制  
式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
不能用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕  
改變子畫面的彩色制式。  
在將電視機輸出錄製在錄像機上時,請  
勿按下SWAP按鈕。如果按下SWAP按  
鈕,將會改變輸出信號。  
15  
使用電視機菜單  
本電視機有許多可利用菜單進行操作的功能。  
為了充分利用電視機的所有功能,需徹底理解基本的菜單操作技術。  
基本操作  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
1 按下MENU/OK按鈕,顯示菜单(主  
菜單)。  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
7
RETURN  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
MULTI  
菜單底部的顯示說明操作所選功能時可使用的  
遙控器的按鈕。  
MUTING  
MENU/OK  
TV/VIDEO  
DISPLAY  
OK  
TV  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
DISP.  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
2 按下  
/
/
按鈕,選擇菜單標  
題,並按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
出現菜單。  
返回到前一菜單:  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
立刻退出菜單:  
按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。  
3 按下  
/
按鈕,選擇功能。  
有關菜單中的功能的詳細說明,請參閱下一頁  
開始的說明。  
16  
使用電視機菜單  
4 按下  
設定。  
/
按鈕,選擇該功能的  
如要操作僅顯示名字的功能,請根據下  
一頁開始的該功能的說明進行操作。  
5 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
菜單消失。  
觀看NTSC制式的電視時,菜單顯示在正  
常垂直尺寸的約一半處。  
用電視機上的按鈕進行操作  
也可利用電視機前面板上的按鈕操作菜單。  
/
按鈕  
/
按鈕  
OK  
按鈕  
TV/VIDEO  
按鈕  
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
在電視機前面板上沒有具有DISPLAY或  
色彩按鈕功能的按鈕。  
17  
使用電視機菜單  
畫面設定菜單  
亮度  
可調節畫面亮度。  
:較暗淡  
:較明亮  
銳度  
E C O  
OK  
TV  
:
DISP.  
可調節畫面銳度。  
:較柔和  
:
:
:較尖銳  
在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時,不能選擇畫面銳度功能。  
畫面模式  
可選擇三種畫面模式中的一種,自動調節畫  
面設定。  
色彩  
亮度:  
可調節畫面色彩。  
:較淡  
增強對比度和銳度。  
:較濃  
普通:  
標準畫面調節。  
色彩微調  
可調節畫面色彩微調。  
:偏紅  
柔和:  
使對比度和銳度變得柔和。  
:偏綠  
也可用遙控器上的PICTURE MODE按鈕  
操作畫面模式。  
僅當彩色制式為NTSC 3.58NTSC 4.43  
時,可改變畫面色彩微調設定。  
詳細說明,請參閱第10頁上的  
PICTURE MODE(畫面模式。  
在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時,不能選擇畫面色彩微調功能。  
面調節  
返回到各画面模式的默認設定值:  
按下藍色按鈕。將當前選擇的畫面模式中的  
畫面設定值返回到默認設定值,並將其再次  
存儲於畫面模式內。  
可根據需要,改變各畫面模式的畫面設定。  
改變的畫面設定被存儲於畫面模式內。  
系統組成  
可調節畫面對比度。  
:較低  
:較高  
18  
使用電視機菜單  
黑白對比  
畫面特征菜單  
可選擇三種黑白對比模式(白色的三種色  
度)中的一種,調節畫面的黑白對比。因為  
白色被用於作為所有其他各種色彩的基準,  
所以改變黑白對比模式將影響屏幕上的所有  
其他各種色彩。  
VNR  
DigiPure  
PULL DOWN  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
:
:
:
灰暗:  
藍白色。觀看明亮圖像時使用這一模式,可  
欣賞生動明快的畫面。  
數字VNR  
數字VNR功能會減少原來圖像的噪音量。  
普通:  
普通白色。  
在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時,不能選擇數字VNR功能。  
暖色:  
紅白色。觀看影片時使用這一模式,可欣賞  
影片所特有的色彩。  
自动:  
電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節數字  
在雙畫面模式或鏡頭功能的16:9模式  
時,不能選擇黑白對比功能。  
VNR的效果,以顯示最佳畫面。  
如果數字VNR效果設得太高,則會使畫  
面銳度太低。如有可能,推薦利用自動  
設定。  
數字ECO電子眼  
如將數字ECO電子眼功能設定為,則將根  
據房間的亮度自動調節屏幕的對比度。這可  
減輕眼睛疲勞並可節省電視機的電力。  
最大:  
數字VNR效果設為最大。若將數字VNR功  
能設定為自動但感到仍有噪音時,請將設定  
自動改為最大。  
:  
數字ECO電子眼功能工作。  
最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質  
圖像。  
:  
數字ECO電子眼功能不工作。  
最小:  
數字 VNR 效果設為最小。若將數字VNR  
功能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像  
的銳度時,請將設定從自動改為最小。  
显示:  
ECO電子眼功能工作。每當房間亮度變化  
時,表示房間亮度的三葉草標記  
會顯示幾  
秒鐘。房間變暗時,顯示在屏幕上的三葉草  
標記會增加。  
最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質  
圖像。  
19  
使用電視機菜單  
DigiPure  
PULL DOWN  
DigiPure功能利用最新數字技術,使畫面顯  
得自然。DigiPure功能包括下列兩個功能。  
利用PULL DOWN功能可在屏幕上更清楚自  
然地顯示影片畫面。  
DigiPure功能:  
此功能透過去除高對比度和鮮明圖像的無需  
自动:  
下拉功能工作。一般將此功能設為自動。  
的邊角,使畫面顯得自然。  
:  
而對於低對比度的圖像,則添加邊角,以變  
得更尖銳更清晰。  
下拉功能不工作。  
可從自動、最小和最大中選擇DigiPure功能  
的設定值。  
觀看NTSC彩色制式的動態圖像時可能會  
顯得不自然。為使動態圖像更清楚,請  
PULL DOWN功能從自動改為。  
畫面移動補償功能:  
此功能可在屏幕上自然地顯示快速移動的圖  
像(例如足球場上的球員或足球)。  
在雙畫面模式或畫面模式為畫面時不能  
選擇此功能。  
在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時,不能選擇DigiPure功能。  
自动:  
電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節  
DigiPure的效果,以顯示最佳畫面。  
如對帶有許多噪音的低質圖像將DigiPure  
效果設得太高,則可能會使噪音惡化。  
如有可能,推薦利用自動設定。  
最大:  
DigiPure效果設為最大。若將DigiPure功  
能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像的  
品質時,請將設定從自動改為最大。  
最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質  
圖像。  
最小:  
DigiPure效果設為最小。若將DigiPure功  
能設定為自動但感到有噪音時,請將設定從  
自動改為最小。  
最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質  
圖像。  
:  
DigiPure功能不工作。  
20  
使用電視機菜單  
按鈕,選擇镜头模  
2 按下  
/
彩色制式  
式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
畫面擴展,並顯示所選的鏡頭模式約5秒  
鐘。  
自動選擇彩色制式。但是,如果畫面不清晰  
或無色彩,請手動選擇彩色制式。  
1 選擇彩色制式,然後按下MENU/  
可從常規鏡頭16:9模式中選擇鏡頭  
模式。詳細說明,請參閱第9頁上的  
ZOOM(鏡頭)按鈕”。  
OK按鈕。  
在接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信  
號)時,不能選擇鏡頭功能。  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
畫面糾正  
有的地方地球的磁力會使畫面歪斜。此時,  
可將其糾正。  
2 按下  
/
按鈕,選擇合適的彩色  
制式。然後按下MENU/OK按  
鈕。  
1 選擇画面纠正,然後按下MENU/  
OK按鈕。  
改變子畫面的彩色制式時,請參閱第15  
頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”詳細  
說明。  
可用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕  
操作彩色制式功能。詳細說明,請參閱  
11頁上的“COLOUR SYSTEM(彩色  
制式)按鈕”。  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
鏡頭  
2 按下  
/
按鈕,直至畫面變得  
水平。然後按下MENU/OK按  
鈕。  
可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請選擇三  
鏡頭模式中的最合適的一種。  
1 選擇镜头,然後按下MENU/OK  
按鈕。  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
21  
使用電視機菜單  
聲音設定菜單  
平衡  
可在左右揚聲器間調節音量的平衡。  
:提高左揚聲器的音量。  
:提高右揚聲器的音量。  
BBE  
自動音控  
當從一個頻道變到另一個頻道或從一種視頻  
模式變為另一種視頻模式時,可防止聲音突  
然變高或變低。  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
:
:
:
:  
立體聲/Ⅱ  
自動音控功能工作。  
觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時,可從雙重語  
言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)或雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音  
Ⅱ)中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不  
理想時,可將立體聲改變為單聲,以便更清  
楚地收聽廣播。  
:  
自動音控功能不工作。  
可分別對電視模式和視頻模式設定自動  
音控功能。例如,可對電視模式設定為  
,而對視頻模式設定為。如果在觀  
看來自視頻端子的圖像時設定自動音控  
功能,則此設定值被登錄為對視頻模式  
的設定。  
:立體聲  
:單聲  
:雙重語言Ⅰ(副聲音Ⅰ)  
:雙重語言Ⅱ(副聲音Ⅱ)  
如果來自廣播電台(或視頻軟體)的聲  
音輸入水準極低,則自動音控功能可能  
不理想。  
單聲道 取消多聲道功能,聲音變成單聲  
道。  
可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。  
BBE  
可利用BBE功能,欣賞易於收聽並忠實於所  
錄製的原有聲音的聲音。  
在視頻模式時,此功能不起作用。  
音調節  
:  
可根據需要調節聲音。  
BBE功能工作。  
低音  
:  
可調節聲音的低音。  
:較弱  
BBE功能不工作。  
BBE Sound,Inc.許可。BBE是  
BBE Sound,Inc.的注冊商。  
:較強  
高音  
可調節聲音的高音。  
:較弱  
:較強  
22  
使用電視機菜單  
音量:  
環繞控制鍵  
可調節從耳機輸出的音量。  
利用環繞控制鍵功能,可欣賞帶有“現場”  
效果的環繞聲音。可選擇兩種環繞控制鍵模  
式之一。  
机内扬声器:  
當此功能為時,則即使連接耳機時也不關  
閉機內揚聲器。  
可從現場單聲道中選擇環繞控制  
模式。詳細說明,請參閱第9頁上的  
SPATIALIZER(環繞控制鍵)按鈕。  
如將此功能為,則當連接耳機時機內揚聲  
器不輸出聲音。  
输出:  
SPATIALIZER係經Desper  
Products,Inc.公司授權製造。  
使用耳機時,可選擇主畫面或子畫面的聲  
音。  
機內揚聲器不輸出子畫面的聲音。  
超重低音  
子畫面的音響衹能為單聲道。對於子畫  
面的音響不能使用立體聲/Ⅰ‧Ⅱ功能。  
利用超重低音(超重低音回聲)功能,可欣  
賞強勁有力的低音。  
:  
超重低音功能工作。  
:  
超重低音功能不工作。  
耳機  
利用耳機功能可將電視聲音從耳機輸出。  
1 選擇耳机,然後按下MENU/OK  
按鈕。  
05  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
2 按下  
/ 按鈕進行選擇,按下  
按鈕設定耳机功能。然後按  
/
MENU/OK按鈕。  
23  
使用電視機菜單  
便利功能菜單  
藍背景  
可將電視機設定為當信號較弱或無信號或者  
當外接裝置無輸入時自動變為藍背景,並靜  
音。  
:  
OK  
:
藍背景功能工作。  
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
:  
藍背景功能不工作。  
睡眠鐘  
童鎖  
可將電視機設定為經過一段指定時間後自動  
關閉。  
可使電視機的前面控制按鈕無效。將這一功  
能設定為時,僅能用遙控器操作電視機。  
利用這一功能可防止兒童自行(未得到父母  
同意)操作電視機。  
1 選擇睡眠钟,然後按下MENU/  
OK按鈕。  
:  
0
120  
童鎖功能工作。  
OK  
TV  
:
:
:
:  
DISP.  
童鎖功能不工作。  
2 按下  
/
電視機開始從設定時間倒計數。  
按鈕,設定時間。  
頻道鎖定  
如有不希望讓兒童觀看的電視頻道,可鎖定  
電視頻道。兒童選擇被鎖定的電視頻道所登  
錄的節目號碼時,屏幕會變成藍色,並顯示  
,而不能觀看此電視頻道。  
可以10分鐘為間隔設定時間,最大可設  
120分鐘(兩個小時)。  
取消睡眠定時器功能:  
按下 按鈕,將時間設為“”。  
設定頻道鎖定功能  
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
1 選擇频道锁定,然後按下數字0  
AV)按鈕。  
菜單消失。  
由睡眠鐘功能關閉電視機的前一分鐘,  
會顯示“晚安!”。  
0000  
睡眠鐘功能不能用於關閉電視機的主電  
源。  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
設定睡眠鐘功能後,可再次顯示睡眠鐘  
功能菜單,以確認或改變剩餘時間。  
24  
使用電視機菜單  
2 設定所需的解码。  
觀看鎖定的電視頻道  
選擇數字:  
1 用數字按鈕或编排一览選擇被鎖  
定的電視頻道所登錄的節目號  
碼。  
/
按下  
按鈕  
移動遊標:  
屏幕變成藍色,並出現 (頻道鎖定。  
/
按下  
按鈕。  
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕。  
5
CH / CC  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
不能用  
/
按鈕選擇鎖定的電視頻道。  
2 按下DISPLAY按鈕,顯示“暗  
”(解码輸入屏幕)。  
OK  
TV  
:
:
:
DISP.  
5
:
4 按下  
道。  
/
按鈕,選擇電視頻  
3 按下數字按鈕,輸入解码。  
鎖被暫時解開,可觀看此電視頻道。  
電視機顯示所選的正在播放的電視頻道  
的電視節目。  
5 按下藍色按鈕,對此電視頻道設  
定頻道鎖定功能。  
如果忘記解码:  
執行“設定頻道鎖定功能”的第一步。  
確認了解碼後,按下TV/VIDEO按鈕,  
退出菜單。  
出現 (頻道鎖定),此電視頻道被鎖  
定。  
需取消頻道鎖定功能時,必須再次進行  
“設定頻道鎖定功能”的操作。  
取消頻道鎖定功能:  
再次按下藍色按鈕。  
頻道鎖定)消失,解除鎖定。  
6 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
菜單消失。  
25  
使用電視機菜單  
自動關機  
可將電視機設定為當廣播結束後15分鐘以上  
收不到信號時將其關閉。  
:  
自動關機功能工作。  
:  
自動關機功能不工作。  
自動關機功能並不關閉電視機的主電  
源。  
自動關機功能對視頻模式不起作用。  
視頻-3設定  
請根據VIDEO-3端子連接的外接裝置的視頻  
信號輸入正確設定視頻-3設定。如果設定不  
正確,則不能顯示圖像。  
视频:  
若輸入普通視頻信號(複合視頻信號)。  
构成:  
若輸入構成視頻信號(Y/CB/CR信號)。  
有關詳細的連接方法,請參閱第33頁上  
的“附加準備”。  
僅當輸入構成視頻信號時,本機才與  
Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)相  
容。  
26  
使用電視機菜單  
導入菜單  
CH  
10  
20%  
OK  
:
:
DISP.  
OK  
:
TV  
按下DISPLAY按鈕,取消自動程序功  
能。  
:
:
DISP.  
2 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼一覽  
內後,將出現编缉菜單。  
語言  
可從菜單的語言一覽表中選擇用於在屏幕上  
顯示的語言。  
CH/CC  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
1 選擇语言,然後按下MENU/OK  
按鈕。  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一  
覽。詳細說明,請參閱第28頁上的“編  
輯/手動”。  
2 按下  
言。  
/
按鈕,選擇一種語  
如果想觀看的電視頻道未被設定在節目  
號碼一覽內,請利用手動功能將其登  
錄。  
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
詳細說明請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手  
”。  
菜單消失。  
自動程序功能不將電視頻道登錄在節目  
號碼編俳 0AV)內。  
自動程序  
可按下列步驟,將在居住區域接收效果良好  
的電視頻道自動登錄在電視節目號碼內。  
如果不需使用編輯/手動功能,請按下  
MENU/OK按鈕,退出編輯菜單。  
1 選擇自动程序,然後按下MENU/  
OK按鈕。  
啟動自動程序功能。接收的電視頻道自  
動登錄於節目號碼一覽內。  
27  
使用電視機菜單  
插入:  
編輯/手動  
此功能利用CH/CC號碼,將新的電視頻道加  
入當前節目號碼一覽內。  
編輯/手動功能可分為兩種類型:  
當前節目號碼的編輯(編輯功能)和將想要  
觀看的電視頻道手動登錄到節目號碼內(手  
功能)。  
删除:  
此功能刪除不需要的電視頻道。  
注意  
手动:  
使用移動、刪除或插入功能將重寫當前  
的節目號碼一覽。  
此功能將新的電視頻道手動登錄在節目號碼  
內。  
因此,將改變某些電視頻道的節目號  
碼。  
3 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
手動功能用於設有頻道鎖定功能的電  
視頻道將取消對電視頻道的頻道鎖定。  
對於節目號碼編俳 0,“AV”將出現在  
節目號碼一覽中。  
當有電視頻道已被登錄在編俳 99中時,  
利用插入功能將刪除此電視頻道。  
功能  
1 選擇编缉/手动,然後按下  
MENU/OK按鈕。  
移動  
1 按下  
道。  
/
按鈕,選擇電視頻  
CH/CC  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
2 按下 按鈕,啟動移动功能。  
CH/CC  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
CC 01  
02  
03  
2 按照需利用的功能的操作說明操  
作功能。  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
移动:  
3 按下  
/
按鈕,選擇新的節目  
此功能改變電視頻道的節目號碼。  
號碼。  
解码:  
取消移动功能:  
此功能為電視頻道登錄頻道名(解碼)。  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
4 按下 按鈕,將電視頻道的節目  
號碼改變為新的節目號碼。  
28  
使用電視機菜單  
解碼  
CH/CC  
1 按下  
道。  
/
按鈕,選擇電視頻  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01(B/G)  
02  
03  
2 按下紅色按鈕,啟動解码功能。  
3 輸入頻道名(解码)。  
按下  
/
/
按鈕,選擇字符。  
OK  
TV  
+
-
FINE+  
FINE-  
按下  
按鈕,移動遊標。  
DISP.  
CH/CC  
取消手动功能:  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
3 按下 按鈕,選擇想登錄的電視  
頻道的制式(聲音制式)。  
M
有關各國或各地區的聲音制式,請參閱  
12頁上的“廣播制式”表。  
OK  
TV  
DISP.  
4 按下綠色或紅色按鈕,尋找電視  
頻道。  
取消解码功能:  
當電視機找到電視頻道時停下搜索,並  
顯示電視頻道。  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
4 按下MENU/OK按鈕,為電視頻  
道登錄頻道名。  
5 反復按下綠色或紅色按鈕,直至  
出現所需的電視頻道。  
刪除  
若電視頻道接收不佳:  
1 按下  
道。  
/
按鈕,選擇電視頻  
按下藍色或黃色按鈕,微調電視頻道。  
如果能正常顯示電視頻道的畫面,卻不  
能正常收聽聲音:  
2 按下黃色按鈕,刪除電視頻道。  
從節目號碼一覽中刪除此電視頻道。  
系統的設定不正確。按下 按鈕,選擇  
發出正常聲音的系統。  
手動  
6 按下MENU/OK按鈕,將電視頻  
道登錄於節目號碼。  
1 按下  
/
新電視頻道的節目號碼。  
按鈕,選擇想登錄的  
回到編輯菜單。  
2 按下藍色按鈕,啟動手动功能。  
CH/CC號碼的右側,出現電視頻道的  
系統(聲音制式)。  
29  
使用電視機菜單  
插入  
準備  
請從第31頁上找到電視頻道的頻道號碼  
所對應的CH/CC號碼。  
1 按下  
/
新電視頻道的節目號碼。  
按鈕,選擇想登錄的  
2 按下綠色按鈕,啟動插入功能。  
CH/CC  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
**  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
`-9  
CH/CCDISP.  
3 按下  
/
按鈕,根據電視頻道  
CH/CC號碼選擇“CC”或  
CH”。  
取消插入功能:  
按下DISPLAY按鈕。  
4 按下數字按鈕,輸入CH/CC號  
碼。  
電視機轉換為登錄模式。  
登錄結束時,此電視頻道的畫面會出現  
在屏幕上。  
CH/CC號碼是表示電視的廣播頻率的號  
碼。如果電視機檢測不到CH/CC號碼的  
廣播頻率所對應的電視頻道,則顯示無  
信號狀態的畫面。  
30  
使用電視機菜單  
CH/CC號碼  
需利用第30頁上的插入功能時,請從下表找出對應於電視頻道的頻道號碼的CH/CC號碼。  
US:美國頻道號碼是用於美國和菲律賓等國的頻道號碼。  
CCIRCCIR頻道號碼是用於中東和東南亞等地區的頻道號碼。  
OIRTOIRT頻道號碼是用於東歐、俄羅斯和越南等國的頻道號碼。  
CHINA:中國頻道號碼。用於中國等國的頻道號碼。  
AUSTRALIA:澳大利亞頻道號碼是用於澳大利亞等國的頻道號碼。  
頻道  
頻道  
CH  
US  
CCIR  
E2  
OIRT  
CHINA  
DS-1  
DS-2  
DS-3  
DS-7  
DS-8  
DS-9  
AUSTRALIA  
AU-0  
AU-1  
AU-2  
AU-6  
AU-7  
AU-8  
AU-9  
CH  
US  
CCIR  
S-1  
OIRT  
CHINA  
AUSTRALIA  
CH 02  
CH 03  
CH 04  
CH 05  
CH 06  
CH 07  
CH 08  
CH 09  
CH 10  
CH 11  
CH 12  
CH 13  
CH 14  
CH 15  
CH 16  
CH 17  
CH 18  
CH 19  
CH 20  
CH 21  
CH 22  
CH 23  
CH 24  
CH 25  
CH 26  
CH 27  
CH 28  
CH 29  
CH 30  
CH 31  
CH 32  
CH 33  
CH 34  
CH 35  
CH 36  
CH 37  
CH 38  
CH 39  
CH 40  
CH 41  
CH 42  
CH 43  
CH 44  
CH 45  
CH 46  
CH 47  
CH 48  
CH 49  
CH 50  
CH 51  
CH 52  
CH 53  
CH 54  
CH 55  
CH 56  
CH 57  
CH 58  
CH 59  
CH 60  
CH 61  
CH 62  
CH 63  
CH 64  
CH 65  
CH 66  
CH 67  
CH 68  
CH 69  
CH 70  
US-2  
R1  
CC 01  
CC 02  
CC 03  
CC 04  
CC 05  
CC 06  
CC 07  
CC 08  
CC 09  
CC 10  
CC 11  
CC 12  
CC 13  
CC 14  
CC 15  
CC 16  
CC 17  
CC 18  
CC 19  
CC 20  
CC 21  
CC 22  
CC 23  
CC 24  
CC 25  
CC 26  
CC 27  
CC 28  
CC 29  
CC 30  
CC 31  
CC 32  
CC 33  
CC 34  
CC 35  
CC 36  
CC 37  
CC 38  
CC 39  
CC 40  
CC 41  
CC 42  
CC 43  
CC 44  
CC 45  
CC 46  
CC 47  
CC 48  
CC 49  
CC 50  
CC 51  
CC 52  
CC 53  
CC 54  
CC 55  
CC 56  
CC 57  
CC 58  
CC 59  
CC 60  
CC 61  
CC 62  
CC 63  
CC 64  
CC 75  
CC 76  
CC 77  
CC 78  
CC 79  
CC 95  
CC 96  
CC 97  
CC 98  
CC 99  
AU-5  
US-3  
E3  
S-2  
Z-1  
Z-2  
Z-3  
Z-4  
US-4  
E4  
R2  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
S-3  
US-5  
E5  
S-4  
US-6  
E6  
S-5  
US-7  
E7  
S-6  
AU-5A  
US-8  
E8  
S-7  
Z-5  
Z-6  
Z-7  
DS-6  
Z-9  
Z-10  
Z-11  
US-9  
E9  
DS-10  
DS-11  
DS-12  
Z-8  
S-8  
US-10  
US-11  
US-12  
US-13  
US-14  
US-15  
US-16  
US-17  
US-18  
US-19  
US-20  
US-21  
US-22  
US-23  
US-24  
US-25  
US-26  
US-27  
US-28  
US-29  
US-30  
US-31  
US-32  
US-33  
US-34  
US-35  
US-36  
US-37  
US-38  
US-39  
US-40  
US-41  
US-42  
US-43  
US-44  
US-45  
US-46  
US-47  
US-48  
US-49  
US-50  
US-51  
US-52  
US-53  
US-54  
US-55  
US-56  
US-57  
US-58  
US-59  
US-60  
US-61  
US-62  
US-63  
US-64  
US-65  
US-66  
US-67  
US-68  
US-69  
E10  
E11  
E12  
R10  
R11  
R12  
AU-10  
AU-11  
S-9  
S-10  
S-11  
S-12  
S-13  
S-14  
S-15  
S-16  
S-17  
S-18  
S-19  
S-20  
S-21  
S-22  
S-23  
S-24  
S-25  
S-26  
S-27  
S-28  
S-29  
S-30  
S-31  
S-32  
S-33  
S-34  
S-35  
S-36  
S-37  
S-38  
S-39  
S-40  
S-41  
A
B
Z-12  
Z-13  
Z-14  
Z-15  
Z-16  
Z-17  
Z-18  
Z-19  
Z-20  
Z-21  
Z-22  
Z-23  
Z-24  
Z-25  
Z-26  
Z-27  
Z-28  
Z-29  
Z-30  
Z-31  
Z-32  
Z-33  
Z-34  
Z-35  
Z-36  
Z-37  
C
D
E
F
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
E61  
E62  
E63  
E64  
E65  
E66  
E67  
E68  
E69  
DS-13  
DS-14  
DS-15  
DS-16  
DS-17  
DS-18  
DS-19  
DS-20  
DS-21  
DS-22  
DS-23  
DS-24  
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
DS-25  
DS-26  
DS-27  
DS-28  
DS-29  
DS-30  
DS-31  
DS-32  
DS-33  
DS-34  
DS-35  
DS-36  
DS-37  
DS-38  
DS-39  
DS-40  
DS-41  
DS-42  
DS-43  
DS-44  
DS-45  
DS-46  
DS-47  
DS-48  
DS-49  
DS-50  
DS-51  
DS-52  
DS-53  
DS-54  
DS-55  
DS-56  
DS-57  
W+1  
W+2  
W+3  
W+4  
W+5  
W+6  
W+7  
W+8  
W+9  
W+10  
W+11  
W+12  
W+13  
W+14  
W+15  
W+16  
W+17  
W+18  
W+19  
W+20  
W+21  
W+22  
W+23  
W+24  
W+25  
W+26  
W+27  
W+28  
X
Y
Z
Z+1  
Z+2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
DS-4  
DS-5  
AU-3  
AU-4  
A-5  
A-4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
31  
使用電視機菜單  
演示菜單  
OK  
:
TV  
:
DISP.  
:
演示功能自動演示一些電視功能。  
演示功能設定於時:  
每當打開電視機時,自動開始演示。  
若不需演示,請將演示功能設為。  
1 按下  
/
選擇閉,則取消演示功能。  
按鈕,選擇。  
2 按下MENU/OK按鈕,結束設  
定。  
將演示功能設定為,開始演示。  
停止演示:  
按下遙控器上的任一按鈕。  
32  
附加準備  
接外接裝置  
將裝置連接於本電視機時,請參閱連接圖。  
連接前:  
請參閱裝置所附的說明書。有的裝置的  
連接方法與連接圖可能有所不同。另  
外,為了保證正常工作,可能需根據連  
接方法改變裝置的設定。  
關閉包括電視機在內的所有裝置。  
40頁上的“技術規格”內有視頻端子  
的詳細說明。如果所需連接的裝置不在  
下列連接圖中,請參閱“技術規格”,  
選擇最合適的視頻端子。  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
IN (VIDEO-4)  
未附帶連接電纜。  
連接AV COMPU LINK支持的裝置時,  
請參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV  
COMPU LINK的裝置”。  
1 VCR(複合信號)  
2 VCRS-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信號,Y/  
C)  
3
用於錄製的VCR(複合信號)  
4 DVD放像機(複合信號)  
5 DVD放像機(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)  
AUDIO  
R
L/MONOVIDEO  
S
O
V
E
R
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
C
R
C
B
Y/VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
R
L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
信號,Y/C)  
L
UDIO  
VIDEO  
A
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
6 DVD放像機(構成視頻信Y/CB/CR)  
7
8
電視遊戲(複合信號)  
電視遊戲(S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
號,Y/C)  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
9 Camcorder(複合信號)  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
0 CamcorderS-VIDEO(超級-視頻)信  
VIDEO-3/  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
COMPONENT  
Y/C)  
OUTPUT  
-
耳機  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
A AV COMPU LINK電纜  
33  
附加準備  
2 用音頻電纜將電視機的AUDIO插  
口(L/MONOR)和裝置的  
AUDIO OUT(音頻L/R輸出)插  
口連接起來。  
連接方法  
1 用視頻電纜將電視機的VIDEO插  
口和裝置的VIDEO OUT插口連接  
起來。  
如果裝置的聲音輸出為單聲道:  
用音頻電纜將裝置的AUDEO OUT插口和電  
視機的L/MONO插口連接起來。  
如果用S-VIDEO電纜將裝置連接於  
電視機:  
S-VIDEO電纜來代替視頻電纜,將VCR的  
S-VIDEO OUT接口和電視機的“SS-  
VIDEO接口連接起來。  
同時用視頻電纜和S-VIDEO電纜將VCR與電  
視機連接時,用視頻電纜進行的連接將無  
效。  
將裝置連接於OUTPUT端子  
透過OUTPUT端子輸出現在正用電視機觀看  
的畫面和聲音的信號。透過將VCR連接於  
OUTPUT端子,可將現正播放的圖像和聲音  
錄制在VCR上。此時,請按照下列步驟,將  
VCROUTPUT端子連接起來。  
如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機  
連接於電視機:  
1 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的  
VIDEO插口和VCRVIDEO IN  
(視頻輸入)插口連接起來。  
2 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的  
AUDIO插口(LR)和VCR的  
AUDIO IN(音頻L/R輸入)插口  
連接起來。  
用構成視頻電纜來代替視頻電纜,將VIDEO-  
3端子的三個插口(Y/VIDEOCBCR)和  
DVD放像機的COMPONENT(構成視頻輸  
出)插口連接起來。然後按照第26頁上的  
視頻-3設定視頻-3設定設定為構成。  
(當輸入構成視頻信號時,)本機與  
Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)相  
容。  
關閉電視機時,來自OUTPUT端子的信  
號也將消失。  
如果DVD放像機作為構成視頻信號輸出  
Progressive視頻信號(525P),則當將  
該裝置用構成視頻電纜連接在電視機上  
時,可不失真地觀看錄製在DVD碟片上  
的圖像。  
來自VIDEO-3/COMPONENT端子的構  
成信號輸入不能透過OUTPUT端子輸  
出。  
如果用視頻電纜將裝置連接於  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT(視頻-  
3/構成)端子:  
用視頻電纜將電視機的Y/VIDEO插口和裝置  
VIDEO OUT插口連接起來。  
連接耳機  
用立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)將耳機與  
電視機前面板上的耳機插口連接起來。  
然後按照第26頁上視頻-3設定”將視頻-3  
設定設定為視頻。  
VIDEO-4端子,VIDEO插口標示為  
V”。  
34  
附加準備  
接支持AV COMPU  
利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系  
統的條件  
LINK的裝置  
需帶有AV COMPU LINK端子的裝置。  
利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系統,可在操作  
一個裝置時,自動控制相關裝置。  
如將此系統應用於本電視機,可在操作一個  
外接裝置時,自動進行電視機的所需操作,  
而無需用電視機的遙控器打開電視機或改變  
視頻模式。  
須用AV COMPU LINK電纜連接電視機  
和裝置。本電視機不附帶AV COMPU  
LINK電纜。如沒有AV COMPU LINK電  
纜,請用兩端帶有直徑為3.5mm(單  
聲)的插入式插頭的電纜連接。  
須將裝置連接於正確的VIDEO端子,並  
正確安裝。否則AV COMPU LINK遙控  
系統不能正確發揮作用。詳細說明,請  
參閱“安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系  
統”。  
AV COMPU LINK遙控系統  
的操作例  
僅需按下VCRDVD放像機上的PLAY按鈕,  
可觀看來自這些裝置的圖像。  
電視機須為待機模式(POWER指示燈亮  
紅燈)。如果電視機的主電源處於關閉  
狀態(POWER指示燈熄滅),AV  
僅需將預先錄製的錄像帶(去除錄製保護片  
的磁帶)插入VCR,可觀看錄像帶。  
COMPU LINK遙控系統將不起作用。  
僅需操作AV控制接收器,可正確打開或關閉  
(待機模式)電視機或改變視頻模式。  
AV COMPU LINK遙控系統的性能因所  
連接的裝置而定。請參閱裝置的使用說  
明書。  
安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系  
注意:  
當選擇“電視聲音AV控制接收器  
的輸入音源時,有時電視機的靜音功能  
會自動啟動,機內揚聲器不發出聲音。  
此時,請按下電視機遙控器上的  
VOLUME m 按鈕或MUTING按鈕,取  
消靜音功能。可重新從機內揚聲器收聽  
聲音。  
有些裝置的安裝方法不同於此處說明的  
方法。安裝前,請務必通讀該裝置的使  
用說明書。  
1 將裝置連接於電視機的VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2端子。  
如用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機和  
電視機連接起來:  
DVD放像機和電視機的VIDEO-3端子連接  
起來。  
有關連接方法的詳細說明,請參閱第33  
頁上的“連接外接裝置。  
35  
附加準備  
2 AV COMPU LINK電纜將電視  
機的AV COMPU LINK端子和裝  
置的AV COMPU LINK端子連接  
起來。  
3 根據所連接的VIDEO端子改變裝  
置的設定。  
如果VCR連接於VIDEO-1端子:  
VCR的遙控碼設為A碼。  
如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-1端  
子:  
DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設  
DVD2。  
如果VCR連接於VIDEO-2端子:  
VCR的遙控碼設為B碼。  
如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-2端  
子:  
DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設  
DVD3。  
如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機  
VIDEO-3端子相連接:  
DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設  
DVD1。  
有關改變裝置的設定的詳細說明,請參  
閱該裝置的使用說明書。  
如果所連接的裝置既無遙控碼,也無AV  
COMPULINK MODE時,請將其連接於  
電視機的VIDEO-1端子。  
36  
故障排除  
如果使用本電視機時發生問題,請在提出修理前仔細閱讀此“故障排除”。可能會很方便地自  
己解決問題。例如,如果交流電源插頭未插入交流電源插座或電視機天線有問題,而您卻可能  
懷疑是電視機的問題。  
重要:  
此故障排除指南僅包括難於確定原因的問題。如果在操作某一功能時發生問題,請參閱說  
明該功能的操作之頁,而不是此故障排除指南。  
在按照此故障排除的說明或有關功能的操作說明操作後仍無進展,請將交流電源插頭從交  
流電源插座上拔下,讓人修理電視機。請勿自行修理電視機或拆下後蓋。  
果不能打開電視機  
面不清楚  
交流電源插頭是否插入交流電源插座?  
如果整個畫面不清楚(雪花圖像),則  
天線或天線電纜可能有問題。請進行下  
列檢查,解決問題:  
POWER指示燈是否亮燈?如未亮燈,請  
按下主電源按鈕。  
電視機和天線是否正確連接?  
天線電纜是否損壞?  
畫面或無聲音  
天線是否指向正確方向?  
天線是否損壞?  
是否所選擇的電視頻道的接收效果特  
差?若如此,會啟動藍背景功能,整個  
屏幕會變成藍色,聲音變為靜音。如需  
觀看此電視頻道,請按照第24頁上的  
藍背景”的說明,將藍背景功能設定  
。  
如果電視機或天線的接收受到其他裝置  
的干擾,在畫面上可能會出現條狀或噪  
音。將擴音器、個人電腦或吹風器等會  
干擾電視機的裝置從電視機旁移開,或  
改變位置。如果天線受到無線電發射塔  
或高壓線的影響,請向當地的供銷商恰  
詢。  
電視頻道的聲音制式的設定值是否正  
確?  
請按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM  
(聲音制式)按鈕”解決問題。  
如果電視機受到來自大山或大樓的信號  
反射的干擾,會出現雙重圖像(重  
影)。  
請改變天線的方向或將其換成具有更佳  
方向性的天線。  
電視頻道的彩色制式的設定值是否正  
確?請按照第11頁上的“COLOUR  
SYSTEM(彩色制式)按鈕”解決問  
題。  
是否正確調節色彩或亮度?請按照第18  
頁上的“畫面調節”正確調節。  
37  
故障排除  
當在屏幕上顯示白亮的靜止圖像(例如  
白色服裝),白色部分可能會看上去像  
是彩色的。這是因顯像管的特性而引起  
的不可避免的現象,而不是電視機的故  
障。  
接收Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)  
時,下列功能無效;  
遙控器功能:  
ZOOMPIPMULTIFREEZE和  
STROBE按鈕  
菜單功能:  
當圖像從屏幕上消失後,這一不自然的  
色彩也會跟著消失。  
銳度色彩微調數字VNRDigipure  
鏡頭。  
觀看市售的未正確錄製的視頻軟體或錄  
像帶時,圖像頂部可能會變形。  
這是因視頻信號而引起的,而不是故  
障。  
■聲音不清楚  
是否正確調節低音或高音?若未正確調  
節,請按照第22頁上的“聲音調節”正  
確調節。  
電視頻道接收不佳時,可能較難收聽立  
體聲或雙重語言聲音。此時,請按照第  
22頁上的“立體聲/Ⅰ‧Ⅱ”的說明,將  
其改為單聲道,以更清晰地收聽。  
能操作  
遙控器的電池是否耗盡?  
請按照第4頁上的“將電池裝入遙控器”  
的說明,換上新電池,解決問題。  
是否在電視機的側面或後面或者在離電  
視機7米以上之處使用遙控器?請在電視  
機的前面或在離電視機7米以內使用遙控  
器。  
是否將童鎖功能設定為?如果將童鎖  
功能設定為,則不能用電視機的前面  
控制按鈕操作電視機。請按照第24頁上  
的“童鎖”的說明,將童鎖功能設定為  
。  
如果突然不能操作電視機,請按下電視  
機的主電源按鈕,關閉主電源。再次按  
下主電源按鈕,打開主電源。如果電視  
機恢復正常狀態,則未出故障。  
38  
故障排除  
他說明  
睡眠鐘功能或自動關機功能工作時,  
電視機將自動關閉。  
如果電視機突然關閉,請按下POWER按  
鈕,再次打開電視機。如果此時電視機  
工作正常,則無問題。  
使用耳機時,如果不想從機內揚聲器發  
出聲音,請將耳機菜單中的機內揚聲器  
設定改為。詳細說明,請參閱第23頁  
上的“耳機”  
如將揚聲器之類的磁性裝置放在電視機  
的附近,在屏幕的邊角上畫面可能會重  
疊或色彩不自然。此時,請將該裝置遠  
離電視機。如果因揚聲器產生這一現  
象,請使用磁屏蔽揚聲器。  
畫面可能因地球磁性的影響而歪斜。此  
時,請按照第21頁上的“畫面糾正”,  
糾正歪斜。  
進行頻道等操作時,需稍等片刻方能出  
現圖像。這不是故障。這是因為需待圖  
像穩定後方能顯示。  
因溫度的突然變換,電視機可能會發出  
劈啪的響聲。如果圖像和聲音正常,則  
無問題。如果觀看電視時,經常聽見劈  
啪的響聲,則可能是由其他原因造成  
的。  
為了小心起見,請讓技術服務人員檢查  
一下。  
觸摸屏幕表面時,可能會感到由靜電引  
起的輕微的觸電。  
這是由顯像管的結構引起的不可避免的  
現象,而不是電視機的問題。  
請休息一會,該靜電放電不會對人體造  
成有害影響。  
39  
技術規格  
廣播制式  
彩色制式  
頻道和頻率  
BGIDKK1M  
PALSECAMNTSC3.58/4.43MHz  
VHF低頻道(VL=46.25168.25 MHz  
VHF高頻道(VH=175.25463.25 MHz  
UHF頻道(U=471.25863.25 MHz  
可接收中頻段(XZ+2S1S10)、高頻段  
S11S20)和超高頻段(S21S41)的有線頻道。  
多聲道制式  
A2B/G)、NICAMB/GID/K)制式  
交流110240V50/60 Hz  
電源要求  
音頻輸出  
額定功率輸出:20W+20W  
VIDEO-1(視頻-1)端子  
RCA接口×3S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)接口×1  
‧備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)(Y/C)輸入和音頻  
L/R輸入。  
VIDEO-2(視頻-2)端子  
RCA接口×3  
‧備有視頻輸入和音頻L/R輸入。  
RCA接口×5  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
(視頻-3/構成)端子  
‧備有視頻輸入/構成視頻(Y/CB/CR)輸入和音頻L/R輸入  
‧備有Progressive視頻信號(525P信號)輸入。  
RCA接口×3S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)接口×1  
‧備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO(超級-視頻)(Y/C)輸入和音頻  
L/R輸入。  
VIDEO-4(視頻-4)端子  
OUTPUT(輸出)端子  
RCA接口×3  
‧備有視頻輸出和音頻L/R輸出。  
立體聲微型插口(直徑3.5mm)  
遙控器×1RM-C215)  
耳機插口  
附件  
AA/R6/5號乾電池×2  
揚聲器  
HV-34LPZ12cm 圓形×23.5cm 圓形×2  
HV-29LPZ10cm 圓形×23.5cm 圓形×2  
HV-34LPZ:最大255W,平均170W  
HV-29LPZ:最大254W,平均170W  
HV-34LPZ:顯像管87cm 可視範圍80cm  
HV-29LPZ:顯像管73cm 可視範圍68cm  
HV-34LPZ898mm×728mm×579mm  
HV-29LPZ732mm×588mm×518mm  
HV-34LPZ75kg  
消耗功率  
屏幕尺寸  
(對角測量)  
尺寸(寬×高×長)  
重量  
HV-29LPZ48kg  
設計和規格如有變更,恕不另行通告。  
因涉及到侵犯版權的問題,不得到原有圖像版權主的同意,利用本電視機的鏡頭功能顯示在屏  
幕上的圖像不得用於在公共場所(餐館、賓館等)的商業或演示目的的顯示。  
40  
COLOUR TELEVISION  
HV-34LPZ  
HV-29LPZ  
Contents  
Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6  
Remote control buttons  
and functions . . . 8  
Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20  
PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21  
SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24  
FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LCT1218-001A-H  
0402-Ki-NV-JMT  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.  
To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this  
manual thoroughly before you begin.  
WARNING:  
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-  
ANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
CAUTION:  
TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING  
RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.  
1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.  
2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,  
grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.  
3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.  
Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.  
When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more  
than the minimum distances as shown.  
15 cm  
10 cm  
10 cm  
15 cm  
4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.  
5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.  
Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.  
6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it  
when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,  
wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.  
Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.  
7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to  
disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.  
2
Setting up your TV  
CAUTION  
Turn off all the epuipment including the TV  
before connecting anything.  
1
Connecting the aerial and VCR  
• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good  
quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.  
Fig.A  
• Read the manual that came with the VCR  
before connecting.  
If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :  
Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket  
on this TV .  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :  
1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial  
input socket on the VCR, and  
connect the VCR and TV with  
another aerial cable.  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack and the TV's  
VIDEO jack with a video cable.  
AV COMPULINK  
To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO  
cable:  
Fig.B  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-  
VIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a  
video cable .  
Back of the TV  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
A
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT  
(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's  
AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with  
an audio cable.  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect  
the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack  
and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an  
audio cable.  
You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if  
your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.  
For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK  
Supported Devices” on page 38.  
3
Setting up your TV  
2 Connecting the power cord  
Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.  
3 Putting the batteries into the  
Remote control  
Use two AA/R6 batteries.  
Insert the batteries from the  
end, making sure the  
and polaritiles are correct.  
Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.  
If the remote control does not work properly,  
replace the batteries.  
The batteries we supply are only for setting up  
and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon  
as necessary.  
4 Making the initial settings  
When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial  
setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.  
1 Press the main power button on the TV  
The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.  
If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does  
not change to green, your TV is in the standby  
mode. Press the POWER button on the remote  
control to turn the TV on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has  
already been turned before. In this case,use the  
"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions  
to make the initial settings. For details, see  
"INSTALL menu" on page 29.  
POWER lamp  
Main power button  
2 Press the MENU/OK button  
The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose  
a language for the on-screen language.  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
4
Setting up your TV  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to choose  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are automatically  
stored in the programme numbers list.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
AUTO PROGRAM  
CH  
10  
7
20%  
RETURN  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press  
the DISPLAY button.  
MUTING  
4 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number (PR)  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
EDIT  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in  
the programme numbers list, you can register it  
using the MANUAL function.  
TEXT  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a  
TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL  
function, press the MENU/OK button to close the  
EDIT menu.  
Now, the setting up is complete.  
Please enjoy your new JVC TV!  
5
TV buttons and functions  
Turn the main power on  
Press the main power button 1 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is  
in the standby mode.  
To turn the main power off :  
press the main power button again.  
The POWER lamp 2 goes off.  
Turn the TV on from standby  
mode  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and  
your TV will be turned on.  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
You can also turn on the TV by pressing the  
TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby  
mode.  
8 2  
7
Choose a TV channel  
1
9
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Choose a VIDEO terminal  
Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or  
CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .  
Adjust the volume  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .  
The volume level indicater appears.  
MENU button 6  
Press to open the menu.  
For details, see "Operation with the buttons on  
the TV" on page 19.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Remote control sensor  
and ECO sensor 9  
0
-
6 5 4 3  
ECO lamp 7  
If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.  
6
TV buttons and functions  
SPATIALIZER lamp 8  
If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO  
or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.  
Headphone jack 0  
Connect the headphones with a stereo  
mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).  
When using the headphones, follow the  
operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 25.  
A
UDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
A
UDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
L
/
M
O
N
O
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
VIDEO-1 terminal =  
See page 3 and 36.  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-2 terminal ~  
See page 36.  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
=
~
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDLI/OMONO  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal !  
!
@
OUTPUT  
See page 28 and 36.  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPU LINK  
VIDEO-4 terminal -  
See page 36.  
$
#
OUTPUT terminal @  
See page 36.  
Aerial socket #  
Connect the aerial cable.  
See page 3.  
AV COMPU LINK terminal $  
See page 36 and 38.  
7
Remote control buttons and functions  
Turn the TV on from standby mode  
Press the POWER button.  
The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be  
turned on.  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MODE  
You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
To turn the TV off:  
Press the POWER button again.  
The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV  
enters standby mode.  
7
RETURN  
Choose a TV channel  
MULTI  
Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has  
been set.  
MUTING  
Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the  
programme number (PR) with the number  
buttons.  
If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,  
press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry  
system.  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For  
details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.  
MENU/  
OK  
If you do not have a clear picture or no colour  
appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR  
SYSTEM button" on page 11.  
If you cannot hear sound normally even when the  
picture appears normally, follow the operation  
procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
Adjust the volume  
TEXT  
Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.  
You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.  
Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on  
page 25.  
8
Remote control buttons and functions  
16:9  
Watch images from external  
devices  
Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external  
device has been connected.  
This mode converts a normal picture (4:3  
aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-  
pect ratio).  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the  
CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.  
To return to a TV channel:  
Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+  
buttons or the number buttons.  
Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect  
ratio that have been squeezed into a  
normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you  
can restore their original demensions.  
MUTING button  
Press the MUTING button to turn off  
the volume. Pressing the MUTING  
button again resumes the previous  
volume level.  
SPATIALIZER button  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a  
"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER  
function.  
Press the SPATIALIZER button to  
choose a mode.  
ZOOM button  
You can change the screen size according to the  
picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one  
from the following ZOOM modes.  
LIVE :  
Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo  
sound converting it into surround sound  
with added depth and ambience.  
Press the ZOOM button to choose a  
mode.  
MONO :  
If you press the ZOOM button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen and  
the ZOOM function does not operate.  
Mono allows you to enjoy normal  
monaural sound by converting it into a  
stereo-like sound.  
OFF :  
REGULAR  
This function is turned off.  
Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as  
its original size is.  
The LIVE mode works properly only  
with stereo sound.  
The LIVE mode does not work  
correctly with headphones.  
The MONO mode works properly only  
with monaural sound.  
ZOOM  
You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect  
ratio) to fill the TV screen.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The left side and right side of the Wide  
picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.  
9
Remote control buttons and functions  
To register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
BASS button  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
Choose the Programme number to which  
the channel you want to register has been  
set, and press the RETURN+ button and  
hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.  
"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is  
displayed and the registration is com-  
pleted.  
Press the BASS button to turn the  
SUPER BASS function on or off.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
To cancel register a TV channel as the  
"Return Channel" :  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
while viewing any TV channel, press the  
RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3  
seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS  
CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-  
ration is cancelled.  
PICTURE MODE button  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to  
adjust the picture settings automatically.  
When you turn off the TV, the  
registration for the "Return Channel" is  
cancelled.  
Press the PICTURE MODE button  
choose a mode.  
If you want to view the "Return Channel"  
and another TV channel alternately, first  
choose a channel other than the  
"Return Channel". and then press the  
RETURN+ button to change the  
channel to the "Return Channel" In this  
way, you can view two channels  
alternately by pressing the RETURN+  
button.  
BRIGHT :  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
STANDARD :  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
SOFT :  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
RETURN function :  
The TV temporarily memorises the TV  
channel that was choosen right before the  
current TV channel as the "Last Channel".  
By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can  
alternately view the current TV channel and  
the "Last Channel".  
RETURN+ button  
The RETURN+ button has two functions;  
the RETURN+ function and the RETURN  
function. If a channel has been registerd as  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN+  
function operates. If there is no setting for  
the "Return Channel", the RETURN  
function operates.  
If you want to view two channels  
alternately by using the RETURN  
function, first choose one TV channel  
and then choose the other TV channel  
with the Number buttons. If you choose  
the TV channel without using the  
Number buttons, there are cases where  
a channel other than the one you first  
chose is registered as the "Last  
Channel".  
RETURN+ function :  
By registering a channel you frequently  
view as the "Return Channel", you can  
select that channel at any time simply by  
pressing the RETURN+ button.  
10  
Remote control buttons and functions  
/ button  
Choose a TV channel or a  
VIDEO terminal  
1 Press the DISPLAY button to  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
display the PR LIST.  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons  
to choose a programme number  
or VIDEO terminal.  
Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
Press the  
choose a sound mode.  
/ button to  
For programme numbers with the  
CHANNEL GUARD function set, the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed  
next to the programme number in the PR  
LIST.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
The VIDEO terminals are registered after  
the programme number PR99.  
MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
COLOUR SYSTEM button  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button  
to choose the appropriate colour  
system.  
DISPLAY button  
You can display the PR LIST, programme  
number or VIDEO terminal number on the  
screen.  
AUTO :  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
Press the DISPLAY button changes the  
display as follows:  
This function detects a colour system from  
the input signal.  
The AUTO mode may not function  
properly if you have poor signal quality.  
If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO  
mode, choose another colour system  
manually.  
PR LIST  
PR  
ID  
1
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
The AUTO mode detects a colour system  
from the input signal and chooses the  
appropiate colour system automatically.  
No indication  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of  
the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour  
system of the SUB-picture" on page 15  
for details.  
-10  
+10  
11  
Remote control buttons and functions  
For the colour systems in each  
BROADCASTING SYSTEMS  
For sound sysytem colour system in your country  
or rigion, refer to the table below.  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
SOUND SYSTEM button  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
The sound system is chosen automati-  
cally. However, if you cannot hear the  
sound normally even when the picture  
appears normally, chooes the sound  
system maunually.  
PAL  
Asia,  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
PAL  
PAL  
Middle  
East  
Press the SOUND SYSTEM  
button to choose the appropriate  
sound system.  
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
SECAM  
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
NTSC  
SECAM  
PAL  
Russia, etc  
B/G : B/G system  
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
I
: I system  
PAL  
D/K : D/K system  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
M
: M system  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
Africa  
This function does not work in the  
Nigeria, etc  
PAL  
VIDEO mode.  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
SECAM  
For the sound systems in each  
country or region, see the table  
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on  
page 12.  
SOUND SYSTEM  
Area  
Country or Region  
System  
Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,  
United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.  
Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,  
Thailand, India, etc.  
B/G  
Asia,  
Middle  
East  
China, Vietnam, etc  
Hong Kong, etc  
D/K  
I
Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,  
Saudi Arabia, etc.  
B/G  
M
Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc  
Russia, etc  
D/K  
D/K  
B/G  
I
Czech Republic, Poland, etc  
Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc  
UK, etc  
Europe  
Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc  
Republic of South Africa, etc  
B/G  
I
Africa  
Nigeria, etc  
B/G  
B/G  
Egypt, Morocco, etc  
12  
Remote control buttons and functions  
If you press the STROBE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the STROBE function does  
not operate.  
FREEZE button  
You can view the Main picture's forzen image  
as the SUB-picture.  
Press the FREEZE button.  
You cannot change the TINT setting for  
the still images on the screen even if  
you are viewing a programme with  
NTSC colour system.  
Still pictures  
MAIN  
To cancel the FREEZE function :  
Press the FREEZE button again.  
Using the MULTI  
function  
You can display multi-pictures that enable  
you to easily find a program you want to  
view.  
You cannot use the FREEZE button when  
the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are  
displayed on the screen.  
If you press the FREEZE button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the FREEZE function does  
not operate.  
1 Press the MULTI button.  
Press the MULTI button changes the  
display as follow:  
5-pictures multi mode  
2
1
STROBE button  
Still  
pictures  
3
4
5
You can view the MAIN-picture as 15  
consecutive still images.  
MAIN  
Press the STROBE button.  
Moving  
picture  
16-pictures multi mode  
1
2
4
3
Still  
5
6
8
7
pictures  
Moving  
picture  
9
10  
14  
12  
16  
11  
15  
5
13  
Moving  
picture  
To cancel the STROBE function:  
Press the STROBE button to return to the  
MAIN-picture.  
If signal level of the MAIN-picture is  
weak, the still images become abnormal.  
Cancel the MULTI function  
You cannot use the STROBE button  
when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-  
picture are displayed on the screen.  
To display next Multi pictures :  
Press the NEXT button.  
13  
Remote control buttons and functions  
2 Choose the desired picture with  
Using the PIP function  
You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at  
the  
/
and  
/
buttons, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
the same time.  
The screen switches to the TV channel or  
VIDEO mode of your choice.  
Press the PIP button.  
Press the PIP button changes the display as  
follows:  
Any programme numbers to which no TV  
channel has been registered, or  
programme numbers to which  
CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not  
displayed.  
Twin pictures mode  
2
5
You cannot perform menu operations  
such as headphone volume adjustment.  
Cancel the MULTI function once to  
perform menu operations.  
MAIN  
SUB  
If you press the MULTI button when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal), 525Pappears on the  
screen and the MULTI function does not  
operate.  
Picture in picture mode  
2
SUB  
5
MAIN  
During the short period that is required  
for the Multi-pictures display to close no  
sound comes from the television.  
Cancel the PIP function  
You cannot view a picture from the same  
programme number (or the same VIDEO  
terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and  
the SUB-picture at the same time.  
If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the  
quality of the SUB-picture may also be  
poor.  
If the picture standards of both pictures  
are different, the top and bottom or one of  
them may be missing.  
The ZOOM function does not operate  
when viewing pictures using the PIP  
function.  
The SUB-picture cannot be output from  
TV.  
If you press the PIP button when receiving  
the Progressive Video Signal (525P  
signal), 525Pappears on the screen  
and the PIP function does not operate.  
14  
Remote control buttons and functions  
You cannot change the COLOUR  
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the  
COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote  
control.  
Choose a TV channel for  
the SUB-picture  
Press the SUB-P -/+ button.  
POSITION button  
You can adjust the position of the SUB-  
Picture when using the Picture in picture  
mode.  
Listen to the sound of SUB-  
picture  
You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on  
your headphones while listening to the sound  
of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.  
Press the POSITION button  
repeatedly.  
For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.  
Each time you press the button, the SUB-  
Picture moves counterclockwise.  
Change the colour system  
of the SUB-picture  
1 While the SUB-picture is dis-  
played, press the MENU/OK  
button to display the MENU  
(main manu).  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons  
to choose PICTURE FEATURES,  
and then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
SWAP button  
You can replace the MAIN-picture and the  
SUB-picture with each other.  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
Press the SWAP button.  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
MAIN  
SUB  
NTSC 3.58  
AUTO  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the  
choose SUB, and then press the  
buttons to choose the  
/
buttons to  
Do not press the SWAP button while you  
are recording the TV output on the VCR.  
If you do, the output signal will change.  
/
appropriate colour system. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
15  
Remote control buttons and functions  
Viewing a teletext  
programme  
1 Choose a TV channel with a  
teletext broadcast.  
HOLD button  
You can hold a teletext page on the screen  
for as long as you want, even while several  
other teletext pages are being received.  
Press the HOLD button.  
2 Press the TV/TEXT button.  
The  
(hold) are displayed at the top left  
Press the TV/TEXT button changes the  
mode as follows:  
of the screen.  
To cancel the Hold function:  
Press the HOLD button again.  
REVEAL button  
Some teletext pages include hidden text  
(such as answers to a quiz).  
TV mode  
TV and  
Text mode  
You can display the hidden text.  
Each time you press the REVEAL  
button, text is hidden or revealed.  
SIZE button  
Text mode  
You can double the height of teletext  
display.  
3 Choose a teletext page by  
pressing the CHANNEL-/+  
buttons, number buttons or  
coloured buttons.  
Press the SIZE button.  
INDEX button  
You can return to the index page instantly.  
To return to the TV mode:  
Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO  
button.  
Press the INDEX button.  
In the List mode, you can return to the  
page number displayed in the lower left  
area of the screen.  
If you have trouble receiving tetetext  
broadcasts, consult your local dealer or  
the broadcast station.  
CANCEL button  
You can serch for a teletext page while  
watching TV.  
In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is  
fixed to the REGULAR mode.  
No menu operations are possible when  
viewing a teletext programme.  
1 Press the number button to  
enter a page number, or press  
the coloured button.  
If characters on a teletext programme do  
not appear properly, change the  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For  
details, see TELETEXT LANGUAGEon  
page 34.  
The TV searches for a teletext page.  
16  
Remote control buttons and functions  
2 Press the CANCEL button.  
Using the List mode  
You can store the numbers of your favourite  
teletext pages in memory and call them up  
quickly using the coloured buttons.  
The TV programme appears. When the  
TV finds the teletext page, its page  
number appears in the upper left of the  
screen.  
To store the page numbers :  
1 Press the MODE button to  
engage the List mode.  
3 Press the CANCEL button to  
return to a teletext page when  
the page number is on the  
screen.  
The stored page numbers are displayed  
at the buttom of the screen.  
You cannot return to the TV mode with  
the CANCEL button.  
2 Press a coloured button to  
choose a position. Then press  
the number buttons to enter the  
page number.  
SUBPAGE button  
Some teletext pages include sub-pages that  
are automatically displayed. You can hold  
any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.  
3 Press and hold down the  
STORE button.  
1 Press the SUBPAGE button to  
operate the Sub-page function.  
The four page numbers blink white to  
indicate that they are stored in memory.  
Sub-page numbers are displayed at the  
left of the screen.  
To call up a stored page :  
1 Press the MODE button to  
engage the List mode.  
2 Press a coloured button to  
which a page has been as-  
signed.  
Colour*  
Yellow  
White  
Meaning of sub-page number  
Currently being displayed.  
Can be displayed.  
Cannot be displayed and  
it is not sent.  
Blue or Red  
* : Background color of the sub-page  
number.  
To exit the List mode :  
Press the MODE button again.  
2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons  
to choose a sub-page number.  
To cancel the Sub-page function:  
Press the SUBPAGE button again.  
17  
Using the TV's menu  
This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.  
To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating  
techniques fully.  
Basic operation  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
1 Press the MENU/OK button to display  
PICTURE  
MODE  
the MENU (main menu).  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
MENU  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
PICTURE SETTING  
PICTURE FEATURES  
SOUND SETTING  
FEATURES  
INSTALL  
DEMO  
6
9
7
OK  
:OK  
RETURN  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
MULTI  
The display appearing at the bottom of a menu  
indicates buttons on the remote control you  
can use when you operate a chosen function.  
MUTING  
MENU/OK button  
TV/VIDEO button  
DISPLAY button  
OK  
TV  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
DISP.  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
2 Press the  
/
and  
/
buttons to  
choose a menu title, and press the  
MENU/OK button.  
The menu appears.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
To return to the previous menu:  
TV/TEXT  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
To exit a menu instantly:  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
Press the TV/VIDEO button.  
TEXT  
3 Press the  
function.  
/
buttons to choose a  
For details of the functions in the menus, see  
the following pages.  
18  
Using the TV's menu  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose the setting of that func-  
tion.  
If you want to operate a function which  
appears only with its name, follow the  
descriptions of that function on the  
following pages.  
5 Press the MENU/OK button to  
comple the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
When watching the television with the  
NTSC system, the menus are displayed  
at about half of their normal verical size.  
Operation with the  
buttons on the TV  
You can also operate the menus using the  
buttons on the front panel of the TV.  
OK  
button  
TV/VIDEO  
button  
/
/
buttons  
buttons  
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
There is no button on the front panel of  
the TV that has the function of the  
DISPLAY or coloured buttons.  
19  
Using the TV's menu  
PICTURE SETTING menu  
SHARP  
You can adjust the picture sharpness.  
PICTURE SETTING  
: softer  
: sharper  
PICTURE MODE  
CONTRAST  
STANDARD  
BRIGHT  
SHARP  
COLOUR  
You cannot select the SHARP function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
TINT  
WHITE BALANCE  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
MID  
ON  
OK  
:OK  
RESET  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
COLOUR  
You can adjust the picture colour.  
: lighter  
: deeper  
PICTURE MODE  
You can choose one of three PICTURE  
MODEs to adjust the picture settings  
automatically.  
TINT  
You can adjust the picture tint.  
: reddish  
BRIGHT:  
Heightens contrast and sharpness.  
: greenish  
STANDARD:  
Standardizes picture adjustment.  
You can change the TINT setting (picture  
tint) only when the colour system is  
NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.  
SOFT:  
You cannot select the TINT function when  
receiving the Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal).  
Softens contrast and sharpness.  
You can also operate the PICTURE  
MODE function with the PICTURE MODE  
button on the remote control.  
For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"  
on page 10.  
To return to the default settings  
in each PICTURE MODE :  
Press the blue button. Returns the picture  
settings in the currently chosen PICTURE  
MODE mode to the default settings, and  
stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.  
Adjusting the picture  
You can change the picture settings of each  
picture mode as you like. The picture settings  
changed are stored in the picture mode.  
WHITE BALANCE  
You can select one of three WHITE  
BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to  
adjust the white balance of the picture. Since  
white is the colour which is used as a  
refernce for all the other colours, changing  
the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the  
appearance of all the other colours on the  
screen.  
CONTRAST  
You can adjust the picture contrast.  
: lower  
: higer  
BRIGHT  
You can adjust the picture brighetness.  
: darker  
: brighter  
COOL:  
A bluish white. Using this mode when  
watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy  
a more vivid and bright picture.  
20  
Using the TV's menu  
MID:  
PICTURE FEATURES menu  
The normal white colour.  
PICTURE FEATURES  
WARM:  
DIGITAL VNR  
DigiPure  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AUTO  
PULL DOWN  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
ZOOM  
A raddish white. Using this mode when  
watching films allows you to enjoy colours  
that are characteristic of films.  
PICTIRE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE  
function in the Twin pictures mode or the  
16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.  
DISP  
:BACK  
DIGITAL VNR  
The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the  
amount of noise in the original picture.  
DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR  
function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-  
matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the  
brightness of your room. This reduces eye  
strain for you and the power consumption of  
the TV.  
You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR  
function when receiving the Progressive  
Video Signal (525P signal).  
AUTO:  
The TV will be automatically adjust the level  
of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the  
amount of noise in the picture, giving you the  
best possible picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too  
high it can make the picture less sharp.  
It is recommended to use the AUTO  
setting if you can.  
DISPLAY :  
This function is turned on. Further, clover  
marks indicating the brightness of your  
room are displayed for several seconds each  
time the brightness changes. The number of  
clover marks displayed on the screen  
MAX:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but still notice some noise,  
change the setting from AUTO to MAX.  
increases as your room becomes darker.  
The MAX setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
MIN:  
The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to  
the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR  
function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness  
of the original picture has not been  
reproduced fully, change the setting from  
AUTO to MIN.  
The MIN setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
21  
Using the TV's menu  
MIN:  
DigiPure  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
minimun. When you set the DigiPure function  
to AUTO and notice some noise, change the  
setting from AUTO to MIN.  
The Digipure function uses the latest in  
digital technology to give you a natural  
looking picture. The Digipure function  
includes the following two functions.  
• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-  
quality pictures which contain very little  
noise.  
Digipure function:  
This function helps to create a natural looking  
picture by eliminating unnecessary edges  
from high-contrast and crisp images.  
Conversely, for images with low-contrast,  
edges are added to produce a sharper, more  
detailed picture.  
OFF:  
The DigiPure function is turned off.  
PULL DOWN  
The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema  
film picture more smoothly and naturally on  
the screen.  
You can choose from the DigiPure function  
settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.  
Picture motion compensation  
function:  
This function displays fast-moving pictures  
(for example, the players or ball in a football  
game) more smoothly and naturally on the  
screen.  
AUTO:  
This function is turned on. Normally keep this  
function set to AUTO.  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
You cannot select the Digipure function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
• The motion may appear unnatural when  
viewing images with the NTSC colour  
system. To make the motion smoother,  
switch the PULL DOWN function from  
AUTO to OFF.  
AUTO:  
The TV will automatically adjust the level of  
the DigiPure effect to match the amount of  
noise in the picture, giving the best possible  
picture.  
You cannot select this function in the  
Twin pictures mode or the Picture in  
picture mode.  
• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on  
a low-quality picture that contains a lot of  
noise, this may actually make the noise  
worse. It is recommended to use the  
AUTO setting if you can.  
MAX:  
The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the  
maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to  
AUTO but feel that the original picture quality  
has not been reproduced fully, change the  
setting from AUTO to MAX.  
• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-  
quality pictures which contain a lot of  
noise.  
22  
Using the TV's menu  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
The colour system is chosen automatically.  
However, if the picture is not clear or no  
colour appears, choose the colour system  
manually.  
ZOOM  
You can change the screen size according to  
the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum  
one of three ZOOM modes.  
1 Choose ZOOM, then press the  
1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
MENU/OK button.  
ZOOM  
REGULAR  
ZOOM  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
16:9  
PAL  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
OK  
:OK  
DISP  
:BACK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to choose  
choose a ZOOM mode. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The picture expands and the chosen  
ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5  
seconds.  
the appropriate colour system.  
Then press the MENU/OK  
button.  
When changing to the COLOUR  
SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see  
"Change the colour system of the SUB-  
picture" on page 15 for details.  
You can choose a ZOOM mode from  
REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For  
details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.  
You can also operate the COLOUR  
SYSTEM function with the COLOUR  
SYSTEM button on the remote control.  
For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM  
button" on page 11.  
You cannot select the ZOOM function  
when receiving the Progressive Video  
Signal (525P signal).  
PICTURE TILT  
There are cases where the Earth's magnetic  
force may make the picture tilt. If this  
happens, you can correct the picture tilt.  
1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
PICTURE TILT  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons until the  
picture becomes level. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
23  
Using the TV's menu  
SOUND SETTING menu  
BALANCE  
You can adjust the volume balance between  
the left and right speakers.  
SOUND SETTING  
MONO  
STEREO/  
BASS  
TREBLE  
: turn the left speaker's volume level up.  
: turn the right speaker's volume level up.  
BALANCE  
AI VOLUME  
BBE  
SPATIALIZER  
SUPER BASS  
HEADPHONE  
ON  
ON  
LIVE  
ON  
AI VOLUME  
OK  
:OK  
You can prevent the sudden increase or  
decrease of sound that occurs when  
changing the channel to another channel or  
switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO  
mode.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
STEREO / I•II  
When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast  
programme, you can choose the sound from  
Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When  
the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,  
you can change from stereo to mono sound  
so that you can hear the broadcast more  
clearly and easily.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and  
VIDEO mode can be set separetely.  
For example, you can set it to be OFF in  
TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.  
If you set the AI VOLUME function while  
viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,  
the setting is registered as the setting for  
VIDEO mode.  
: Stereo sound  
: mono sound  
: Bilingual I (sub I)  
: Bilingual II (sub II)  
MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,  
and the sound becomes monaural.  
The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate  
as expected if the sound input level from  
a broadcast station (or video software) is  
extremely low.  
The sound mode you can choose differs  
depending on the TV programme.  
This function does not work in the VIDEO  
modes.  
BBE  
You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-  
to-listen sound that is faithful to the original  
sound recorded.  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound to your liking.  
ON :  
BASS  
This function is turned on.  
You can adjust the low tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE  
is a registered trademark of BBE  
Sound, inc.  
TREBLE  
You can adjust the high tone of the sound.  
: weaker  
: stronger  
24  
Using the TV's Menu  
TV SPEAKER:  
SPATIALIZER  
You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"  
effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.  
You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER  
modes.  
When this function is on, the TVs speaker  
does not shut off the sound even if head-  
phones are connected.  
If you set this function to off, the TVs speaker  
does not output the sound when the  
headphones are connected.  
You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode  
from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.  
For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "  
on page 9.  
OUTPUT:  
You can choose the sound from the MAIN-  
picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when  
using the headphones.  
The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under  
lisense from Desper Products,Inc.  
The TVs speaker does not put out the  
sound from the SUB-picture.  
SUPER BASS  
You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by  
using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)  
function.  
The sound of the SUB-picture is mono  
only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II  
function for the sound of the SUB-picture.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
HEADPHONE  
This function enables you to output the TVs  
sound from your headphones.  
1 Choose HEADPHONE, then  
press MENU/OK button.  
HEADPHONE  
VOLUME  
TV SPEAKER  
OUTPUT  
05  
ON  
MAIN  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Use the  
and the  
/
/
button to select,  
button to set the  
HEADPHONE function. Then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
VOLUME :  
You can adjust the volume of the sound  
output from your headphones.  
25  
Using the TV's menu  
FEATURES menu  
BLUE BACK  
You can set the TV to automatically change  
to a blue screen and mute the sound if the  
signal is weak or absent, or when there is no  
input from an external device.  
FEATURES  
SLEEP TIMER  
BLUE BACK  
ON  
CHILD LOCK  
CHANNEL GUARD  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
OFF  
OFF  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
COMPONENT  
ON :  
OK  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
SLEEP TIMER  
You can set the TV to automatically turn off  
after a set time.  
CHILD LOCK  
You can disable the front control buttons of  
the TV. When this function is set to ON, the  
TV can be operated only by using the remoto  
control.  
1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
Use this function to prevent children from  
operating the TV at their own discretion  
(without parent consent).  
SLEEP TIMER  
0
12  
0
OFF  
ON :  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
This function is turned on.  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
OFF:  
This function is turned off.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to set the  
period of time.  
The TV begins count down from the set  
time.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
When there is a TV channel you do not want  
your children to watch, you can lock out the  
channel. Even when a child chooses a  
programme number for a locked out channel  
the screen will change to blue and display  
so the channel cannot be viewed.  
You can set the period of time a  
maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10  
minitue steps.  
To cancel this function:  
Press the button to set a period of time to  
"OFF".  
To set this function  
1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
press the number 0 (AV) button.  
The menu disappers.  
SET ID NO.  
0000  
One minute before this function turns off  
the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.  
OK  
:OK  
This function cannot be used to turn off  
the TV's main power.  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
When this function is on, you can display  
the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm  
or change the remaining time.  
26  
Using the TV’s menu  
2 Set the ID number you want.  
To view a locked TV  
channel  
To choose a number:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
1 Choose a programme number in  
which a TV channel locked with  
the number buttons or PR LIST.  
To move a cursor:  
/
Press the  
buttons.  
The screen changes to blue and the  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button.  
CHANNEL GUARD  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH / CC  
5
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
You cannot choose a locked TV channel  
with the  
/
buttons.  
GUARD  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
2 Press the DISPLAY button to  
display " ID NO. " (ID unmber  
input screen).  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a TV channel.  
5
The TV shows the TV programme which  
the chosen TV channel is now  
broadcasting.  
ID NO.:  
3 Press the number buttons to  
enter the ID number.  
5 Press the blue button to set this  
function to the TV channel.  
The lock is temporarily released so you  
can view the TV channel.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the  
TV channel is locked.  
If you have forgotten the ID number:  
To cancel this function:  
Perform step 1 of "To set this function".  
After confirming the ID number, press the  
TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.  
Press the blue button again.  
(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and  
the lock is released.  
When you would like to cancel the  
CHANNEL GUARD function, you must  
perform the operation " To set this  
function" again.  
6 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
27  
Using the TV's menu  
AUTO SHUTOFF  
You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are  
received for about 15 minutes or longer after  
the end of a broadcast.  
ON :  
This function is turned on.  
OFF :  
This function is turned off.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not  
turn off the TV's main power.  
The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a  
VIDEO mode.  
VIDEO-3 SETTING  
Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-  
ing to the video signal input from the external  
device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If  
this setting is incorrect, images will not be  
displayed.  
VIDEO :  
If a normal video signal (composite video  
signal) is input.  
COMPONENT :  
If a Component video signal (Y/CB/CR  
signals) is input.  
For detailed connecting methods, see  
" Additional preparation " on page 36.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)  
only when the component video signal is  
input.  
28  
Using the TVs menu  
AUTO PROGRAM  
INSTALL menu  
CH  
10  
INSTALL  
20%  
LANGUAGE  
OK  
:OK  
AUTO PROGRAM  
EDIT/MANUAL  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
DISP  
:BACK  
OK  
:OK  
To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,  
TV  
:EXIT  
press the DISPLAY button.  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 After the TV channels have been  
stored in the programme number  
list, the EDIT menu appears.  
LANGUAGE  
You can choose the language you want to  
use for the on-screen display from the  
language list in a menu.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press  
the MENU/OK button.  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
You can proceed to edit the programme  
numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL  
function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"  
on page 30.  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a language.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
If a TV cannel you want to view is not  
stored in the programme numbers list,  
you can register it using the MANUAL  
function.  
The menu disappers.  
For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page  
30.  
AUTO PROGRAM  
You can automatically register the TV  
channels which can be received well at  
your residence in the TV's programme  
numbers by performing the following.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function does not  
store a TV channel to the programme  
number 0 (AV).  
If you do not need to use the EDIT/  
MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK  
button to exit from the EDIT menu.  
1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.  
The TV channels you receive are  
automatically stored in the programme  
numbers list.  
29  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT:  
EDIT/MANUAL  
This function adds a new TV channel in the  
current programme numbers list by using the  
CH/CC number.  
The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into  
two types:  
editing of the current programme numbers  
(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a  
TV channel you want to view to the  
programme number (MANUAL function).  
DELETE :  
This function deletes a unnecessary TV  
Channel.  
MANUAL :  
CAUTION  
Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT  
function rewrites the current programme  
numbers list.  
Resultingly, the programme number of  
some of the TV channels will change.  
This function manually registers a new TV  
channel in a programme number.  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
For programme number PR 0, "AV"  
appears in the programme numbers list.  
When a TV channel which has been  
locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD  
function, using the MANUAL function for  
that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL  
GUARD function.  
FUNCTIONS  
MOVE  
1 Press the  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the button to start the  
MOVE function.  
When a TV channel has already been  
registered in PR 99, using the INSERT  
function deletes the TV channel.  
/
buttons to  
1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then  
press the MENU/OK button.  
EDIT  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
21  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
CC 01  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
ID  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
STORE  
INSERT  
DELETE  
MANUAL  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
MOVE  
DISP  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
2 Follow the operation description  
of a function you want to use and  
operate the function.  
choose a new programe number.  
To cancel the MOVE function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
MOVE :  
This function changes a programme number  
of a TV channel.  
4 Press the button to change the  
programme number of a TV  
channel to a new programme  
number.  
ID :  
This function registers a Channel name (ID)  
to a TV channel.  
30  
Using the TVs menu  
ID  
MANUAL  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01(B/G)  
02  
03  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the red button to start the  
ID function.  
3 Enter a channel name (ID).  
OK  
:OK  
SEARCH+  
SEARCH-  
FINE+  
Press the  
/
buttons to  
TV  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
SYSTEM  
DISP  
choose a character.  
FINE-  
press the  
the cursor.  
EDIT  
/
buttons to move  
To cancel the MANUAL function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
3 Press the button to choose the  
system (sound system) for a TV  
channel you want to register.  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
01  
02  
03  
For the sound systems in each country  
or region, see the table  
M
"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page  
12.  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
DISP  
4 Press the green or red button to  
search for a TV channel.  
To cancel the ID function:  
Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV  
channel. Then the TV channel is  
displayed.  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the MENU/OK button to  
register a channel name to a TV  
channel.  
5 Press the green or red button  
repeatedly until the to TV channel  
you want appears.  
DELETE  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
If the TV channel reception is poor:  
choose a TV channel.  
2 Press the yellow button to delete  
the TV channel.  
Press the bule or yerrow button to  
finetune the TV channel.  
If you cannot hear the normal sound  
even when the picture of the TV channel  
appers normally:  
The TV channel is deleted from the  
programme numbers list.  
The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the  
button and choose a SYSTEM that has  
normal sound.  
MANUAL  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a programme number to  
which you want to register a new  
TV channel.  
6 Press the MENU/OK button and  
register the TV channel to a  
programme number.  
2 Press the bule button to activate  
the MANUAL function.  
The normal EDIT menu is resumed.  
At the right side following the CH/CC  
number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of  
the TV channel appears.  
31  
Using the TV's menu  
INSERT  
PREPARATION  
Find the CH/CC number corresponding  
to the channel number of the TV channel  
from the on page 33.  
1 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a programme number for  
which you will register a new TV  
channel.  
2 Press the green button to start  
the INSERT function.  
EDIT  
PR  
AV  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
ID  
CH/CC  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CH  
CC  
CC  
CC  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
**  
02  
03  
OK  
TV  
:OK  
`-9  
:EXIT  
:BACK  
CH/CC  
DISP  
3 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose "CC" or "CH" according  
to the CH/CC number of the TV  
channel.  
To cancel the INSERT function:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
4 Press the Number buttons to  
enter the remaining CH/CC  
number.  
The TV shifts to registration mode.  
When the registration is completed, the  
picture of the TV channel appears on the  
screen.  
The CH/CC number is a number  
indicating the broadcast frequency to the  
TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV  
channel corresponding to the broadcast  
frequency indicated by the CH/CC  
number, a picture in the no-signal state  
appears.  
32  
Using the TVs menu  
CH/CC number  
When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel  
number of the TV channel from this table.  
US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.  
CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.  
OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.  
AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.  
Channel  
Channel  
CH  
US  
CCIR  
E2  
OIRT  
R1  
AUSTRALIA  
AU-0  
AU-1  
AU-2  
AU-6  
AU-7  
AU-8  
AU-9  
CC  
US  
CCIR  
OIRT  
AUSTRALIA  
CH 02  
CH 03  
CH 04  
CH 05  
CH 06  
CH 07  
CH 08  
CH 09  
CH 10  
CH 11  
CH 12  
CH 13  
CH 14  
CH 15  
CH 16  
CH 17  
CH 18  
CH 19  
CH 20  
CH 21  
CH 22  
CH 23  
CH 24  
CH 25  
CH 26  
CH 27  
CH 28  
CH 29  
CH 30  
CH 31  
CH 32  
CH 33  
CH 34  
CH 35  
CH 36  
CH 37  
CH 38  
CH 39  
CH 40  
CH 41  
CH 42  
CH 43  
CH 44  
CH 45  
CH 46  
CH 47  
CH 48  
CH 49  
CH 50  
CH 51  
CH 52  
CH 53  
CH 54  
CH 55  
CH 56  
CH 57  
CH 58  
CH 59  
CH 60  
CH 61  
CH 62  
CH 63  
CH 64  
CH 65  
CH 66  
CH 67  
CH 68  
CH 69  
CH 70  
US-2  
CC 01  
CC 02  
CC 03  
CC 04  
CC 05  
CC 06  
CC 07  
CC 08  
CC 09  
CC 10  
CC 11  
CC 12  
CC 13  
CC 14  
CC 15  
CC 16  
CC 17  
CC 18  
CC 19  
CC 20  
CC 21  
CC 22  
CC 23  
CC 24  
CC 25  
CC 26  
CC 27  
CC 28  
CC 29  
CC 30  
CC 31  
CC 32  
CC 33  
CC 34  
CC 35  
CC 36  
CC 37  
CC 38  
CC 39  
CC 40  
CC 41  
CC 42  
CC 43  
CC 44  
CC 45  
CC 46  
CC 47  
CC 48  
CC 49  
CC 50  
CC 51  
CC 52  
CC 53  
CC 54  
CC 55  
CC 56  
CC 57  
CC 58  
CC 59  
CC 60  
CC 61  
CC 62  
CC 63  
CC 64  
CC 75  
CC 76  
CC 77  
CC 78  
CC 79  
CC 95  
CC 96  
CC 97  
CC 98  
CC 99  
S-1  
S-2  
AU-5  
US-3  
E3  
US-4  
E4  
R2  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
S-3  
US-5  
E5  
S-4  
US-6  
E6  
S-5  
US-7  
E7  
S-6  
AU-5A  
US-8  
E8  
S-7  
US-9  
E9  
S-8  
US-10  
US-11  
US-12  
US-13  
US-14  
US-15  
US-16  
US-17  
US-18  
US-19  
US-20  
US-21  
US-22  
US-23  
US-24  
US-25  
US-26  
US-27  
US-28  
US-29  
US-30  
US-31  
US-32  
US-33  
US-34  
US-35  
US-36  
US-37  
US-38  
US-39  
US-40  
US-41  
US-42  
US-43  
US-44  
US-45  
US-46  
US-47  
US-48  
US-49  
US-50  
US-51  
US-52  
US-53  
US-54  
US-55  
US-56  
US-57  
US-58  
US-59  
US-60  
US-61  
US-62  
US-63  
US-64  
US-65  
US-66  
US-67  
US-68  
US-69  
E10  
E11  
E12  
R10  
R11  
R12  
AU-10  
AU-11  
S-9  
S-10  
S-11  
S-12  
S-13  
S-14  
S-15  
S-16  
S-17  
S-18  
S-19  
S-20  
S-21  
S-22  
S-23  
S-24  
S-25  
S-26  
S-27  
S-28  
S-29  
S-30  
S-31  
S-32  
S-33  
S-34  
S-35  
S-36  
S-37  
S-38  
S-39  
S-40  
S-41  
A
B
C
D
E
F
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
E61  
E62  
E63  
E64  
E65  
E66  
E67  
E68  
E69  
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1  
W+2  
W+3  
W+4  
W+5  
W+6  
W+7  
W+8  
W+9  
W+10  
W+11  
W+12  
W+13  
W+14  
W+15  
W+16  
W+17  
W+18  
W+19  
W+20  
W+21  
W+22  
W+23  
W+24  
W+25  
W+26  
W+27  
W+28  
X
Y
Z
R3  
R4  
R5  
AU-3  
AU-4  
Z+1  
Z+2  
A-5  
A-4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
33  
Using the TV's menu  
Languages that are not included in the  
teletext language group that you select,  
the sub-titles of the teletext program will  
not be displayed properly.  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
There are 4 types of teletext language  
groups. Set the teletext language group that  
corresponds to the language of the teletext  
program that you want to watch.  
1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,  
then press the MENU/OK button.  
TELETEXT LANGUAGE  
GROUP-1  
GROUP-2  
GROUP-3  
GROUP-4  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
2 Press the  
/
buttons to  
choose a group.  
Group  
Languages  
Turkish, Hungarian, English,  
German, French, Italian,  
Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,  
Swedish, Finnish  
GROUP-1  
Polish, Serbian, Croatian,  
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,  
Rumanian, Hungarian,  
German, French, Italian,  
Swedish, Finnish  
GROUP-2  
Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,  
Lithuanian, Estonian,  
Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,  
Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,  
English, German  
GROUP-3  
GROUP-4  
Arabic, Czech, Slovak.  
Hungarian, English, German,  
French, Italian, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish  
3 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the setting.  
The menu disappears.  
34  
Using the TV's menu  
DEMO menu  
DEMO  
ON  
OFF  
OK  
:OK  
TV  
:EXIT  
DISP  
:BACK  
The DEMO function automatically demo-  
strations some of the TV function.  
When the DEMO function is set to  
ON:  
Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-  
stration starts automatically.  
If you do not want that to happen, set the  
DEMO function to OFF.  
1 Press the  
choose ON.  
/
buttons to  
To cancel the DEMO function,  
choose off.  
2 Press the MENU/OK button to  
complete the settings.  
The DEMO function is set to ON, and the  
demostration will start.  
To stop the demonstration:  
Press one of the button on the remote  
control.  
35  
Additional preparation  
Connecting the external  
devices  
Connect the devices to the TV, paying  
attention to the following connection  
diagram.  
Before connecting anything:  
Read the manuals provided with the  
devices. Depending on the devices, the  
connection method may differ from the  
figure. In addition, the device settings  
may be changed depending on the  
connection method to secure proper  
operation.  
(Behind the cover)  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Turn off all the devices including the TV.  
The "Specifications" on page 43 contains  
the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you  
are connecting a device not listed in the  
following connection diagram, see the  
"Specifications" to choose the best  
VIDEO terminal.  
Note that connecting cables are not  
supplied.  
When connecting devices that are  
supported by AV COMPU LINK, see  
"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported  
Devices" on page 38.  
AUDIO  
R
L/MONOVIDEO  
S
O
V
E
R
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
C
R
C
B
Y/VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
R
R
L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
L
UDIO  
VIDEO  
A
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCR (composite signal)  
VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
VCR for recording (composite signal)  
DVD player (composite signal)  
DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
DVD player (component video signals;  
AUDIO  
L/MONO VIDEO  
R
S
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
Y/CB/CR  
)
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
7
8
9
0
-
TV game (composite signal)  
TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Camcorder (composite signal)  
Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)  
Headphones  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R
AUDIO L/MONO  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPULINK  
A
AV COMPU LINK cable  
36  
Additional preparation  
In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack  
is indicated by "V".  
Connecting methods  
1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack  
and the device's VIDEO OUT  
(video output) jack with a video  
cable.  
2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks  
(L/MONO and R) and the  
device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R  
output) jacks with an audio  
cable.  
If connecting a device to the TV  
with an S-VIDEO cabel :  
Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO  
output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)  
connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of  
connecting with a video cable.  
If the device's sound output is in  
mono :  
Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and  
the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.  
Note that the connection with a video cable  
will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to  
the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO  
cable.  
Connecting devices to the  
OUTPUT terminal  
The signals of the images and sound you are  
currently viewing with this TV are output  
through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting  
a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can  
record the currently shown image and sound  
to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and  
OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.  
If connecting a DVD player to the  
TV with a component video  
cable:  
Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in  
the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's  
COMPONENT (component video output)  
jacks with a component video cables,  
instead of connection with a video cable.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-  
NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on  
page 28.  
B
R
1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the  
OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's  
VIDEO IN (video input) jack with  
a video cable.  
2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and  
R) in the OUTPUT terminal and  
the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R  
input) jacks with an audio cable.  
This Television is compatible with the  
Progressive video signal (525P signal).  
(When the component video signal is  
input.)  
If you have a DVD player that outputs  
Progressive video signals (525P) as a  
component video signal, then by  
attaching the device to the television with  
a component video cable you can see  
the actual images that are recorded on a  
DVD disc as an original image source.  
When you turn off the TV, the signals from  
the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.  
The component signals input from the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot  
be output through the OUTPUT terminal.  
If connecting a device to the  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal  
with a video cable:  
Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the  
device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with  
a video cables.  
Connecting Headphones  
Connect the headphones with a stereo mini  
jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-  
phone jack at the TV front panel.  
Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO  
according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page  
28.  
37  
Additional preparation  
Connecting AV COMPU  
LINK Supported Devices  
AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a  
system in which related devices are  
automatically controlled when you operate  
one device.  
Conditions to use the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system  
A device equipped with an AV COMPU  
LINK terminal is required.  
You must connect the TV and the device  
with an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied  
with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable  
is unavailable, connect them with a cable  
with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at  
both ends.  
If you apply this system to the TV, you can  
have the TV automatically perform the  
required operations by operating one  
external device. You don't have to use the  
TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or  
change the VIDEO modes.  
You must connect the device to an  
appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up  
correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK  
remote control system will not function  
correctly. For details, see Setting up the  
AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system.  
Examples of the AV  
COMPU LINK remote  
control system operations  
Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a  
VCR or a DVD player, you can view images  
from the device.  
The TV must be in standby mode (the  
POWER lamp lighting red). If the TVs  
Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),  
the AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system does not function.  
Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a  
tape with the record safety tab removed) to a  
VCR, you can view the tape.  
Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-  
iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in  
standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed  
correctly.  
Setting up the AV COMPU  
LINK remote control system  
The performance of the AC COMPU  
LINK remote control system varies  
depending on the connected device.  
See the devices instruction manual.  
CAUTION:  
With some devices, the setup method  
differs from the ones explained here.  
Be sure to read the devices instruction  
manual thoroughly before setting it up.  
When you select "TV SOUND" as the  
input source with the AV Control  
Receiver, there are cases where the TV's  
MUTING function automatically operates  
and the sound from the TV's speakers is  
muted.  
In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+  
buttons or the MUTING button on the  
TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-  
ING function. You can regain the sound  
from the TV's speakers.  
1 Connect the device to the TV’s  
VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.  
If you want to connect a DVD  
player to the TV with a compo-  
nent video cable :  
Connect the DVD player to the TVs VIDEO-3  
terminal.  
For detailed connecting instructions, see  
"Connecting the external devices" on  
page 36.  
38  
Additional Preparation  
2 Connect the TVs AV COMPU  
LINK terminal and the devices  
AV COMPU LINK terminal with  
an AV COMPU LINK cable.  
3 Change the devices setting  
according to the VIDEO terminal  
it is connected to.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-1 terminal :  
Set the VCRs remote control code to A code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-1 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD2.  
If a VCR is connected to the  
VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the VCRs remote control code to B code.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-2 terminal:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD3.  
If a DVD player is connected to  
the VIDEO-3 terminal with a  
component video cable:  
Set the DVD players AV COMPULINK MODE  
to DVD1.  
For instructions on how to change the  
devices setting, refer to the devices  
instruction manual.  
If the device you are connecting has  
neither the remote control code nor the  
AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it  
to the TVs VIDEO-1 terminal.  
39  
Troubleshooting  
If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before  
you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if  
the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think  
there is a problem with the TV itself.  
Important:  
This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.  
If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to  
the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.  
After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the  
functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -  
quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the  
rearcover of the TV.  
Has the TV and aerial been  
connected properly?  
Has the aerial cable been damaged?  
Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-  
ection?  
If you cannot turn on  
the TV  
Is the AC plug connected to the AC  
outlet?  
Is the aerial itself faulty?  
Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the  
If the TV or aerial receives interference  
from the other devices, stripes or noise  
may appear in the picture. Move such  
device as an amplifier, personal compu-  
ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-  
ference away from your TV, or try chan-  
ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-  
erference from a radio tower or high-  
voltage wire, please contact your local  
dealer.  
Main power button.  
No picture/No sound  
Have you chosen a TV channel whose  
reception is extremely bad? In this case,  
the BLUE BACK function will be activat-  
ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and  
the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you  
want to view the TV channel, follow the  
description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to  
try to change the BLUE BACK function  
setting to OFF.  
If the TV receives interferences from  
signal reflecting from mountains or  
building, double-pictures(ghosting) will  
occur.  
Try to change the aerials direction or  
replace the antenna with the one with  
better directionality.  
Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct?  
Forrow the description SOUND SYSTEM  
Buttonon page 12 to try to solve the  
trouble.  
Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for  
the TV channels correct? Follow the  
description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"  
on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.  
Poor picture  
If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-  
ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have  
trouble. Check the following to try to  
solve the trouble :  
Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-  
ed properly? Follow the description  
"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
Videotaping teletext is not recommended  
because it may not record correctly.  
40  
Troubleshooting  
When a white and bright still image (su-  
ch as a white dress) is displayed on the  
screen, the white part may look as if it  
were coloured.  
It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to  
the nature of the picture tube itself, and  
not due to a TV failure.  
When the picture disappears from the  
screen, the unnatural colours will also  
disappear.  
When you are viewing a teletext progra-  
mme, you cannot operate the menus.  
Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the  
teletext programme to the ordinary TV  
programme to try operating the menus.  
Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?  
If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,  
you cannot operate the TV with the front  
control buttons of the TV. Follow the  
description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to  
try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.  
When viewing images from commercially  
available video softwear products, or vi-  
deos from videotapes which have been  
recored improperly, the top of the image  
may be distored.  
If the TV operation becomes disabled  
suddenly, press the Main power button  
on the TV and turn off the main power.  
Try to press the Main power button again  
to turn on the main power. If the TV  
returns to a normal state, it is not a  
failure.  
This is due to the condition of the video  
signal, and not because of malfunction.  
Poor sound  
The following functions do not operate  
when receiving Progressive Video Signal  
(525P signal);  
Remote control function:  
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and  
STROBE BUTTON  
MENU function:  
SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure  
and ZOOM  
Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE  
properly? If not, follow the description  
"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try  
to adjust them properly.  
When the TV channel reception is poor, it  
can be hard to hear the stereo or  
bilingual sound. In this case, follow the  
description "STEREO / I II" on page 24  
to hear the sound more easily by  
Other concerns  
changing it to a mono sound.  
When the SLEEP TIMER function or  
AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the  
TV is automatically turned off.  
Operation disabled  
Have the batteries of the remote control  
become exhausted?  
If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to  
press the POWER button to turn on the  
TV once again. At this time, if the TV  
resumes a normal state, there is no  
problem.  
Follow the description "Putting the  
Batteries into the Remote Control" on  
page 4 and replace them with new  
batteries to try solve the problem.  
If you do not want sound emitted from  
the TVs speakers when using  
headphones, change the TV SPEAKER  
setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.  
For details, see HEADPHONEon page  
25.  
Have you attempted to use the remote  
control at the sides or rear of the TV or at  
a location more than seven meters apart  
from the TV location? Operate the remote  
control in the front of your TV or a  
location less than seven meters from  
your TV to try to solve the ploblem.  
41  
Troubleshooting  
If you bring a magnetised device such  
as a speaker near to your TV, a picture  
may be warped or unnatural colours  
appear at the corners of the screen.  
In this case, keep the device apart from  
your TV. If the speaker causes such  
phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded  
speaker instead.  
A picture may be tilted due to the influe-  
nce of the earth's magnetism. In this  
case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page  
23 to complete the tilt.  
It takes a short period of time from the  
time an operation such as changing  
channels is performed until an image is  
displayed. This is not a malfunction.  
This is the time required for the image to  
stabilize before it can be displayed.  
The TV may emit a crackling sound due  
to a sudden change in temperature. It  
does not matter if a picture or sound  
does not show any abnormality. If you  
hear crackling sounds frequently while  
you are viewing the TV, other causes may  
be assumed.  
For precautionary purposes, request  
your service technician to inspect it.  
Touching the screen may cause you feel  
a slight electric shock due to its static  
electricity.  
It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to  
the construction of the picture tube. It is  
not a problem with the TV.  
You can rest assured that this static dis-  
charge does not have harmful influence  
over the human boby.  
42  
Specifications  
Broadcasting systems  
Colour systems  
Channels and frequencies  
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M  
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz  
VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz  
VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz  
UHF channel (U)  
=471.25 to 863.25 MHz  
Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),  
super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).  
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system  
FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)  
Please see the table in the description  
"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34  
AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz  
Sound-multiplex systems  
Teletext systems  
Lauguages displayed by  
teletext  
Power requirements  
Audio output  
Rated Power output: 20W + 20W  
VIDEO-1 terminal  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-2 terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.  
RCA connector X 5  
VIDEO-3/COMPONENT  
terminal  
B
R
Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio  
L/R inputs are available.  
Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.  
RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1  
Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs  
are available.  
VIDEO-4 terminal  
OUTPUT terminal  
RCA connector X 3  
Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.  
Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)  
Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)  
Headphone jack  
Accessories  
AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2  
Speakers  
HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2  
HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W  
HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W  
HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm  
HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm  
HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm  
HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm  
HV-34LPZ : 75kg  
Power consumption  
Screen size  
(measured diagonally)  
Dimensions(W X H X D)  
Weight  
HV-29LPZ : 48kg  
Design and specifications subject to change without notice.  
Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any  
commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent  
of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of  
copyright.  
43  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
LCT1218-001A-H  
0402-Ki-NV-JMT  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Благодарим за покупку цветного телевизора JVC.  
Перед началом использования, пожалуйста, внимательно прочтите это  
руководство, чтобы понять как пользоваться Вашим новым телевизором.  
ОСТОРОЖНО:  
ВО ИЗБЕЖАНИЕ ПОЖАРА И ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРОТОКОМ,  
НЕ ДОПУСКАЙТЕ ДЕЙСТВИЯ НАТЕЛЕВИЗОР ДОЖДЯ ИЛИ ВЛАГИ.  
ВНИМАНИЕ:  
ПРИ ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИИТЕЛЕВИЗОРА СОБЛЮДАЙТЕ  
СЛЕДУЮЩИЕ ПРАВИЛА ЛИЧНОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ.  
1
2
3
Подключайте телевизор только к источникам питания, параметры которых  
соответствуют параметрам, указанным на задней стенке телевизора.  
Не допускайте повреждений шнура и вилки питания. При отключении телевизора от  
сети выньте вилку из розетки, держась за вилку, а не за шнур.  
Ни в коем случае не перегораживайте и не закрывайте вентиляционные отверстия.  
Ни в коем случае не устанавливайте  
телевизор в местах с плохой  
вентиляцией.  
15 cm  
При установке телевизора оставьте  
вентиляционные зазоры по  
периметру, величина зазоров должна  
быть не меньше показанных на рис  
10 cm  
10 cm  
15 cm  
значений.  
4
5
Не допускайте попадания предметов или жидкости в отверстия корпуса.  
В случае неисправности выньте вилку питания из розетки и вызовите мастера.  
Не пытайтесь отремонтировать телевизор самостоятельно, не открывайте заднюю крышку.  
Поверхность экрана телевизора может быть легко повреждена. При обращении с  
телевизором соблюдайте предельную осторожность. Если экран загрязнится,  
протрите его мягкой сухой тканью. Ни в коем случае не нажимайте сильно на экран.  
Ни в коем случае не используйте чистящие или моющие средства.  
6
7
Если Вы не собираетесь пользоваться телевизором в течение длительного времени,  
обязательно отключите его от сетевой розетки.  
2
Настройка телевизора  
ВНИМАНИЕ  
• èÂ‰ ͇ÍËÏ-ÎË·Ó ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚ  
‚Ò˛ ‡ÔÔ‡‡ÚÛÛ, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒΠÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.  
1 Подсоединение антенны и ВМ  
• ÄÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË Ì  
‚ıÓ‰ËÚ.àÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚÂ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚È75-éÏ  
ÍÓ‡ÍÒˇθÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ.  
рис. A  
• èÂ‰ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ  
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ Çå.  
Если ВМ не подсоединяется (см. рис. A):  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û  
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
Если ВМ подсоединяется (см. рис. B):  
1 Подсоедините антенный кабель к  
входному гнезду антенны ВМ и  
соедините ВМ и телевизор друг с  
другом с помощью другого  
антенного кабеля.  
2 Соедините видеокабелем гнездо  
VIDEO OUT (выход видео)  
рис. В  
видеомагнитофона и гнездо  
VIDEO (видео) телевизора.  
Для соединения ВМ с телевизором с помощью  
кабеля S-VIDEO выполните следующее:  
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT  
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ë ‡Á˙ÂÏ S ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl S-VIDEO A, ‡ Ì ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
3 Соедините гнезда VIDEO OUT (L/R  
аудиовыходы) видеомагнитофона и  
гнезда AUDIO (L/МОNО и R)  
телевизора с помощью аудиокабеля.  
• ÖÒÎË ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl  
ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ, ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO  
OUT (‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ë  
„ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO L/MONO (‡Û‰ËÓ Î/ÏÓÌÓ)  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‡Û‰ËÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
• ÖÒÎË Çå ËÏÂÂÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AV COMPU LINK,  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÓÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ AV  
COMPU LINK. ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛  
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,  
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK” ̇ ÒÚ. 38.  
3
ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
2 Подсоединение шнура питания  
Вставьте вилку шнура в сетевую розетку.  
3 Установка батареек в пульт  
дистанционного управления  
ÇÓÁ¸ÏËÚ 2 ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË AA/R6.  
Встаьте батареи, начиная с кнопца, помеченного  
знаком  
и соблюдая полярности  
и
.
• ëӷ≇ÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ ·ÂÁÓÔ‡ÒÌÓÒÚË,  
Û͇Á‡ÌÌ˚ ̇ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈ͇ı.  
• ÖÒÎË ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
ÌÓχθÌÓ Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ, Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË.  
• ŇڇÂÈÍË, ‚ıÓ‰fl˘Ë ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË,  
Ô‰̇Á̇˜ÂÌ˚ ÚÓθÍÓ ‰Îfl ̇ÒÚÓÈÍË Ë  
ÔÓ‚ÂÍË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. á‡ÏÂÌËÚ ˝ÚË ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË  
Í‡Í ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÍÓÂÂ.  
4 Выполнение  
первоначальных настроек  
èË ÔÂ‚ÓÏ ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ  
ÔÂ‚Ó̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl  
ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.  
1 Нажмите кнопку включения питания  
телевизора  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl Ë ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.  
• ÖÒÎË Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒfl  
Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï Ë Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÁÂÎÂÌ˚Ï, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ,  
˜ÚÓ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇ıÓ‰ËÚÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.  
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ  
POWER ̇ ÔÛθÚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.  
Индикатор питания  
POWER  
Кнопка  
выключателя  
сети  
• ÖÒÎË ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ, ˜ÚÓ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÛÊ ‚Íβ˜‡ÎÒfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‰Îfl  
‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËfl ̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ ‚ÓÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚÂÒ¸  
ÙÛÌ͈ËflÏË “üáõä” Ë “ÄÇíé èêéÉ”. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“åÂÌ˛  
çÄëíêéâäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 29.  
2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛ üáõä. Ç˚·ÂËÚ ӉËÌ ËÁ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚  
ËÁ ÔÓfl‚Ë‚¯Â„ÓÒfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÔËÒ͇.  
OK  
TV  
DISP  
4
ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
3 Нажимая кнопки  
/
, выберите  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
РУССКИЙ. После этого нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
PICTURE  
MODE  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
ÇÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ.  
èËÌËχÂÏ˚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚  
·Û‰ÛÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸Òfl ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ‚ˉ ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
7
RETURN  
MULTI  
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ. ̇ÊÏËÚ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
MUTING  
4 После сохранения телеканалов в  
списке номеров программ появится  
меню НАСТРОЙКА.  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
SIZE  
• èÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ ‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÒÔËÒÓÍ  
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË  
çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛  
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“çÄëíêéâäÄ/  
Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
TEXT  
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍ  
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ  
Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü.  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ. Ì ÒÓı‡ÌflÂÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚  
̇ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0 (AV).  
• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È  
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ Ì ÌÛÊ̇, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK  
‰Îfl Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËfl ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.  
На этом настройка заканчивается.  
5
Новый телевизор JVC к Вашим услугам!  
Кнопки и функции телевизора  
Включение питания  
Нажмите кнопку питания 1 .  
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 Á‡„ÓËÚÒfl Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï  
Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÓȉÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.  
ÑÎfl ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl :  
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.  
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 ÔÓ„‡ÒÌÂÚ.  
Включение телевизора,  
находящегося в режиме  
ожидания  
Нажмите одну из кнопок CHANNEL  
m 5 .  
SPATIALIZER ECO POWER  
à̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER 2 ËÁÏÂÌËÚ ˆ‚ÂÚ Ò  
Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó Ì‡ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl.  
• ç‡ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸  
̇ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO 3 .  
8 2  
7
1
9
Выбор телеканала  
Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL m 5 .  
Выбор панели ВИДЕО  
Нажимайте кнопки TV/VIDEO 3 или  
CHANNEL m 5 .  
Регулировка громкости  
Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m 4 .  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÛÓ‚Ìfl „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË.  
Кнопка MENU 6  
(За крышкой)  
ç‡ÊËÏÓÏ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÂÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛.  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡”  
̇ ÒÚ. 19.  
OVER  
V
L/MONO  
R
S
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
IN (VIDEO-4)  
Датчик пульта  
0
-
6 5 4 3  
дистанционного  
управления и ЭКО-сенсор 9  
Индикатор ECО 7  
ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ñàîêéÇéâ  
ùäéëÖçëéê ̇ Çäã ËÎË ÑàëèãÖâ, Á‡„ÓËÚÒfl  
Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ECé.  
6
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ИндикаторSPATIALIZER8  
ùÚÓÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ Á‡„Ó‡ÂÚÒfl, ÂÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸  
ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ SPATIALIZER ̇ åéçé ËÎË LIVE.  
Гнездо головного  
телефона 0  
ÑÎfl ÔÓ‰Íβ˜ÂÌËfl „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ÒÚÂÂÓ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ  
3,5 ÏÏ).  
A
UDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
èË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚  
ÒΉÛÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ, Ô˂‰ÂÌÌ˚Ï ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.  
UDIO  
R A L/MONO  
VIDEO-3  
COMPONENT  
OUTPUT  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A
V
C
O
M
P
U
L
I
N
K
Панель VIDEO-1 =  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3 Ë 36.  
AUDIO  
L/MONO  
VIDEO  
S
R
OVER  
VIDEO-1  
VIDEO-2  
=
~
Панель VIDEO-2 ~  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.  
CR  
CB  
Y/VIDEO  
VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT  
R AUDLI/OMONO  
!
@
OUTPUT  
Панель VIDEO-3/  
COMPONENT !  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 28 Ë 36.  
R
L
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AV COMPU LINK  
$
#
Панель VIDEO-4 -  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.  
Панель OUTPUT @  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.  
Гнездо антенны #  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·Âθ.  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3.  
ПанельAVCOMPULINK $  
• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36 Ë 38.  
7
Кнопки и функции пульта дистанционного управления  
Включение телевизора,  
находящегося в режиме ожидания  
Нажмите кнопку POWER.  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
ñ‚ÂÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒfl Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó  
PICTURE  
MODE  
̇ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚÒfl.  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ, ̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl,  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ̇ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍË  
CHANNEL m ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË.  
Для выключения телевизора:  
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ POWER.  
ñ‚ÂÚ Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒfl Ò ÁÂÎÂÌÓ„Ó  
̇ Í‡ÒÌ˚È Ë ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÓȉÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl.  
7
RETURN  
MULTI  
Выбор телеканала  
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚, ÔÓ‰ ÍÓÚÓ˚Ï ·˚Î  
MUTING  
Á‡ÔÓÏÌÂÌ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.  
Нажимайте кнопку CHANNEL m или  
введите номер программы (ПР) с помощью  
кнопок с номерами.  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌÓ ‚‚ÂÒÚË ‰‚ÛÁ̇˜Ì˚È ÌÓÏÂ, ̇ÊÏËÚ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ -/-- ‰Îfl ÔÂÂıÓ‰‡ ̇ ‰‚ÛÁ̇˜ÌÛ˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ.  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
• ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ èêéÉ. ãàëí.  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“äÌÓÔ͇ DISPLAY” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.  
• ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌˠ̘ÂÚÍÓ ËÎË ÌÂÚ Á‚Û͇, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ  
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.  
• ÖÒÎË Á‚ÛÍ ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚‡ Ì ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ‰‡Ê  
ÔË ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËË ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ,  
‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ SOUND  
SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
TEXT  
Регулирование громкости  
Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m.  
ÉÓÏÍÓÒÚ¸ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ˝ÚËÏË ÍÌÓÔ͇ÏË Ì  
„ÛÎËÛÂÚÒfl. ëΉÛÈÚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.  
Просмотр изображения с  
внешнего устройства  
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ԇÌÂθ VIDEO, ˜ÂÂÁ ÍÓÚÓÛ˛  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÚÒfl ‚̯Ì ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó.  
8
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Нажмите кнопкуTV/VIDEO.  
16:9  
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌË  
ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3) ‚  
¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÙÓÏ‡Ú  
16:9).  
• è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÍÌÓÔÓÍ CHANNEL m ËÎË ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ èêéÉ.  
ãàëí.  
Для возврата к телеканалу:  
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍÛ CHANNEL m  
ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ.  
Кнопка MUTING  
• ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl ‰Îfl  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÙÓχÚÓÏ 16:9,  
ÒʇÚ˚ı ‰Ó Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÙÓχڇ  
(ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3), ÓÌ ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎflÂÚ  
Кнопка MUTING используется для  
выключения звука. Повторный  
нажим кнопки MUTING приводит к  
включению звука на той же  
громкости, которая была до  
выключения звука.  
‚ÓÒÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂ‚Ó̇˜‡Î¸Ì˚È ÙÓχÚ.  
КнопкаSPATIALIZER  
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” (Live) ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound  
(ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).  
Кнопка ZOOM  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÙÓχڇ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl  
ÙÓχڇ. Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÓÔÚËχθÌ˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.  
Нажмите кнопку SPATIALIZER  
для выбора режима.  
Для выбора режима нажмите кнопку  
ZOOM.  
LIVE:  
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ZOOM, ̇  
˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë  
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ZOOM ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚Û͇  
‚ ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ Ò Û‚Â΢ÂÌÌÓÈ  
„ÎÛ·ËÌÓÈ Ë ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÏË ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ‡ÏË.  
MOНO:  
НОРМАЛЬНОЕ  
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÏÓÌÓÁ‚Û͇ ‚  
Á‚ÛÍ, ËÏËÚËÛ˛˘ËÈ ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ  
Á‚Û˜‡ÌËÂ.  
àÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó,  
ÌÂËÁÏÂÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3).  
ВЫКЛ:  
ùÚÓ ÂÊËÏ ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl.  
ZOOM  
• êÂÊËÏ LIVE ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ  
ÚÓθÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚Û͇.  
åÓÊÌÓ ÛÍÛÔÌËÚ¸ ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9), Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ÓÌÓ  
Á‡ÔÓÎÌËÚ ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì.  
• êÂÊËÏ LIVE Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË  
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËË ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚  
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.  
• êÂÊËÏ MOçO ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ  
ÚÓθÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÌÓÁ‚Û͇.  
• ã‚˚È Ë Ô‡‚˚È Í‡fl ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌÓ„Ó  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9) ·Û‰ÛÚ ÓÚÂÁ‡Ì˚.  
ëËÒÚÂχ SPATIALIZER ËÁ„ÓÚÓ‚ÎÂ̇ ÔÓ  
ÎˈÂÌÁËË ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË Desper Products,Inc.  
9
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Для регистрации телеканала как  
“Возвращаемый телеканал” :  
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,  
̇Á̇˜ÂÌÌ˚È ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·,  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËڠ  
̇ʇÚÓÈ ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË Ì ÏÂÌ 3 ÒÂÍÛ̉.  
èÓfl‚ÎÂÌË ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ̇‰ÔËÒË “ÇéáÇêÄí  
äÄçÄãÄ áÄèêéÉêÄååàêéÇÄç!”  
ÔÓ‰Ú‚Âʉ‡ÂÚ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌË „ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.  
Кнопка BASS  
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëìèÖê ÅÄë.  
Для включения и выключения  
функции СУПЕР БАС нажимайте  
кнопку BASS.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
Для отмены регистрации телеканала как  
“возвращаемого” :  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ β·Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËڠ  
̇ʇÚÓÈ ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË Ì ÏÂÌ 3 ÒÂÍÛ̉.  
ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ “ÇéáÇêÄí  
äÄçÄãÄ éíåÖçÖç!”, ˜ÚÓ ÓÁ̇˜‡ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÛ  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.  
Кнопка PICTURE MODE  
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚  
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‰Îfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó  
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
• èË ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËfl “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏÓ„Ó  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·” ÓÚÏÂÌflÂÚÒfl.  
Для выбора режима нажимайте  
кнопку PICTURE MODE.  
• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚ ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸  
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ Ë Í‡ÍÓÈ-ÎË·Ó  
‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, Ò̇˜‡Î‡ ‚˚·ÂËÚ ˝ÚÓÚ  
‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó Ì‡ÊËÏÓÏ  
ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ̇ “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È”  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.íÍËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl  
ÏÂÊ‰Û ‰‚ÛÏfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·ÏË.  
ЯРКИЙ :  
èÓ‚˚¯‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.  
СТАНДАРТ :  
Ñ·ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
Òڇ̉‡ÚÌ˚ÏË.  
МЯГКИЙ :  
ëÏfl„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.  
Функция ВОЗВРАТ :  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Á‡ÔÓÏË̇ÂÚ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÓÒΉÌËÏ  
ÔÂ‰ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓÏ, Í‡Í “èÓÒΉÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ.  
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÊ‰Û ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚  
‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓÏ Ë “èÓÒΉÌËÈ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ.  
Кнопка RETURN+  
äÌÓÔ͇ RETURN+ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌflÂÚ ‰‚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË:  
ÇéáÇêÄí+ Ë ÇéáÇêÄí.  
ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÁ‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì Í‡Í  
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ, ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇéáÇêÄí+.  
ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì Í‡Í  
“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ, ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇéáÇêÄí.  
• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ‰‚‡  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ Ò  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÇéáÇêÄí,  
‚˚·ÂËÚ Ò̇˜‡Î‡ Ó‰ËÌ, ‡ Á‡ÚÂÏ  
‚ÚÓÓÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò  
ˆËÙ‡ÏË. ÖÒÎË ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, Ì  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ÍÌÓÔÍË Ò ˆËÙ‡ÏË, ‚  
͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â “èÓÒΉÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ ÏÓÊÂÚ  
Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl Ì ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î,  
ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÂ‚˚Ï.  
Функция ВОЗВРАТ+ :  
á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡‚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚È  
ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Í‡Í “ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Δ,  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π‚ β·ÓÈ  
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÔÛÚÂÏ Ì‡ÊËχ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+.  
10  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Кнопка  
/
Выбор телеканала или  
панели ВИДЕО.  
1 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для  
отображения ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.  
èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÏÓÊÌÓ  
‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË üÁ˚Í 1  
(Bilingual I (Sub I)) ËÎË üÁ˚Í 2 (Bilingual II (Sub II)).  
èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎflˆËË  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îfl  
ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËfl ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚Û͇.  
2 Кнопками  
/
и
/
выберите номер программы  
или панели ВИДЕО. Затем  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
• êfl‰ÓÏ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ èêéÉ  
ãàëí, ‰Îfl ÍÓÚÓ˚ı Á‡‰‡Ì‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl àÑ  
çéåÖê, ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÁÌ‡Í ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË  
.
Нажмите кнопку  
выбора режима звучания.  
/ для  
: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËfl  
: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËfl  
: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)  
• çÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎÂÈ ÇàÑÖé  
„ËÒÚËÛ˛ÚÒfl ÔÓÒΠÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ Ò  
ÌÓÏÂÓÏ èP 99.  
: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)  
МОНО : éÚÏÂÌflÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ  
ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ.  
Кнопка COLOUR SYSTEM  
• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËfl Á‡‚ËÒflÚ  
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.  
ëËÒÚÂχ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË, o‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË  
̘ÂÚÍÓ ËÎË Ìˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.  
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËχı  
ÇàÑÖé.  
Для выбора системы цветности  
используйте кнопку COLOUR  
SYSTEM.  
КнопкаDISPLAY  
чÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì  
èêéÉ. ãàëí, ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ËÎË  
ÌÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé.  
АВТО :  
ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ‡ÒÔÓÁ̇‚‡ÌË  
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ Ò˄̇ÎÛ.  
Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY.  
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â Ò˄̇· ‡·ÓÚ‡  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé ÏÓÊÂÚ Ì‡Û¯ËÚ¸Òfl. èË  
ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ  
ÄÇíé ‚˚·ÂËÚ ‰Û„Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.  
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË DISPLAY ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í  
ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÏÛ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ËÌÙÓχˆËË Ì‡  
˝Í‡ÌÂ.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ‡ÒÔÓÁ̇ÂÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ Ò˄̇ÎÛ Ë  
‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË.  
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ ëàëíÖåõ ñÇÖíçéëíà  
‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (SUB-  
picture), ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 15.  
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚  
‡Á΢Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı Ë „ËÓ̇ı, Û͇Á‡Ì˚  
‚ Ú‡·Îˈ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ  
ëàëíÖåõ” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.  
11  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Кнопка SOUND SYSTEM  
ТЕЛЕВЕЩАТЕЛЬНЫЕ  
СИСТЕМЫ  
èÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ú‡·Îˈ‡Ï ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl Ë ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË,  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚ ‚‡¯ÂÏ „ËÓÌÂ.  
ëËÒÚÂχ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl  
(Sound System) ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË.  
é‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË  
ÒÎ˚¯ÌÓ Ò ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ÔË ÌÓχθÌÓÏ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.  
Для выбора нужной системы  
звукового сопровождения  
нажимайте кнопку SOUND  
SYSTEM.  
B/G : ÒËÒÚÂχ B/G  
I
: ÒËÒÚÂχ I  
D/K : ÒËÒÚÂχ D/K  
M
: ÒËÒÚÂχ M  
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ  
ÇàÑÖé.  
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl,  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ ‚ ‡Á΢Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı  
Ë „ËÓ̇ı, Ô˂‰ÂÌ˚ ‚ Ú‡·Îˈ  
“íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ ëàëíÖåõ” ̇  
ÒÚ. 12.  
12  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
äÓ‰‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÏÂÂÚÒfl  
Кнопка FREEZE  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÒÚÓÔ-  
͇‰‡ ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ‚ˉ  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë  
ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ  
STROBE ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÌÂθÁfl.  
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive  
Нажмите кнопку FREEZE.  
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl  
STROBE ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÚÓ̇θÌÓÒÚË ñÇ. íéç Ì  
ÏÓ„ÛÚ ·˚Ú¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˚ ‰Îfl ÌÂÔÓ‰‚ËÊÌ˚ı  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ‰‡Ê ÔË  
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC.  
Для отмены функции  
ЗАМОРОЗИТЬ :  
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE.  
äÓ‰‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÏÂÂÚÒfl  
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË MULTI  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ ̇  
˝Í‡Ì ÌÂÒÍÓθÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÚÂÏ,  
˜ÚÓ·˚ ӷ΄˜ËÚ¸ ‚˚·Ó ̇˷ÓΠ 
ËÌÚÂÂÒÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë  
ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ FREEZE  
ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÌÂθÁfl.  
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive  
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl FREEZE  
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
1 Нажмите кнопку MULTI.  
Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ̇ÊËÏÓ‚ ÍÌÓÔÍË MULTI  
˝Í‡Ì ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚÒfl ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ  
Ó·‡ÁÓÏ.  
Кнопка STROBE  
ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔ͇ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ‚ˉ 15  
ÔÓÒΉӂ‡ÚÂθÌ˚ı ÒÚÓÔ-͇‰Ó‚.  
Peжим MULTI из 5 изобрaжeний  
2
1
Нажмите кнопку STROBE.  
3
4
5
Peжим MULTI из 16 изобрaжeний  
1
2
4
3
Для отмены функции STROBE :  
5
6
8
7
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE ‰Îfl ‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í  
ÉãÄÇçéåì ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌ˲.  
9
10  
14  
12  
16  
11  
15  
5
13  
• èË Ò··ÓÏ Ò˄̇ΠÉãÄÇçéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÒÚÓÔ-͇‰˚  
‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚Ó‰flÚÒfl Ò ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËflÏË.  
Oтмена Функции MULTI  
13  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Для вызова на экран следующего  
изображения Multi :  
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË PIP  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ NEXT.  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‰‚Ûı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ (ÉãÄÇç Ë  
ÇíéêéëíÖè).  
2 Выберите изображение с  
помощью кнопок  
/
и
/
, а  
затем нажмите кнопку MENU/  
OK.  
ùÍ‡Ì ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ̇ ‚˚·‡ÌÌ˚È  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠËÎË ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.  
Нажмите кнопку PIP.  
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË PIP ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ̇  
˝Í‡Ì ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:  
• çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, ̇ ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌË͇ÍË  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ Ì Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì˚, Ë  
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, ‰Îfl ÍÓÚÓ˚ı  
̇Á̇˜Â̇ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl àÑ çéåÖê, Ì  
ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒfl.  
• Ç˚ÔÓÎÌflÚ¸ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛, Ú‡ÍËÂ Í‡Í  
„ÛÎËӂ͇ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı  
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚, ÌÂθÁfl. ÑÎfl ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËfl  
ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Ò ÏÂÌ˛ ÓÚÏÂÌËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛  
MULTI.  
2
5
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive  
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇· (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MULTI, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl MULTI  
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
• Ç Ú˜ÂÌË ÌÂÔÓ‰ÓÎÊËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó  
ÔÂËÓ‰‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ„Ó ‰Îfl  
Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËfl ‰ËÒÔÎÂfl ÏÌÓ„Ó˜ËÒÎÂÌÌ˚ı  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË  
·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Ó‚‡Ú¸.  
• ëÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ӉÌÓÈ Ë ÚÓÈ Ê  
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ (ËÎË ˜ÂÂÁ Ó‰ÌÛ Ë ÚÛ Ê  
Ô‡ÌÂθ ÇàÑÖé) Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Í‡Í  
ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ÌÂθÁfl.  
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ Ò˄̇ΠÉãÄÇçéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò˄̇ΠÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ Ú‡ÍÊ ·˚Ú¸ ÔÎÓıËÏ.  
• ÖÒÎË Òڇ̉‡Ú˚ ÓÒÌÓ‚ÌÓ„Ó Ë  
‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‡Á΢Ì˚,  
Ëı ‚ÂıÌËÂ Ë ÌËÊÌË ˜‡ÒÚË ÏÓ„ÛÚ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ¸.  
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË PIP ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl  
ZOOM Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ.  
• ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÌÂθÁfl  
ÔÓÎÛ˜ËÚ¸ ‚ ‚ˉ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó Ò˄̇·  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ̇ʇڸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PIP, ̇ ˝Í‡Ì  
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸ Ò˄̇Π“525P” Ë ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl  
PIP ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
14  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
4 Нажмите кнопку  
выбора ВТОРОСТЕП, а затем  
кнопку для выбора нужной  
/
для  
Выбор телеканала для  
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО  
изображения  
/
системы цветности. После этого  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
Нажмите кнопку SUB-P m.  
• àÁÏÂÌflÚ¸ ëàëíÖåì ñÇÖíçéëíà  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛθڇ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÌÂθÁfl.  
Прослушивание звукового  
сопровождения  
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО  
изображения  
Кнопка POSITION  
á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÔË  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÂÊËχ “PeÊËÏ Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl”.  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚, ÔË  
˝ÚÓÏ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË éëçéÇçéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ·Û‰ÂÚ ÔÂ‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òfl ˜ÂÂÁ  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
Нажимайте кнопку POSITION.  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“çAìôçàKà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.  
èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ Ì‡ÊËÏ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ·Û‰ÂÚ  
ÔÂÂÏ¢‡Ú¸Òfl ‚ ̇Ô‡‚ÎÂÌËË ÔÓÚË‚  
˜‡ÒÓ‚ÓÈ ÒÚÂÎÍË.  
Изменение системы  
цветности  
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО  
изображения  
1 Когда на экране имеется  
ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОЕ  
изображение, нажмите кнопку  
MENU/OK для вызова на экран  
МЕНЮ (основное меню).  
/
Кнопка SWAP  
ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔ͇ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÏÂÌflÚ¸ ÏÂÒÚ‡ÏË  
2 Нажмите кнопки  
/
и
ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
для выборы СВОЙСТВА  
ИЗОБРАЖЕНИЯ, а затем  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
Нажмите кнопку SWAP.  
3 Нажмите кнопку  
/
для  
выборы СИСТЕМА ЦВЕТНОСТИ,  
а затем кнопку MENU/OK.  
• ç ̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SWAP ÔË  
Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌËË ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ̇ Çå –  
˝ÚÓ Ô˂‰ÂÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó  
Ò˄̇· ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
15  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
èÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚  
Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ  
Кнопка HOLD  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËfl (HOLD)  
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÍÓθ  
Û„Ó‰ÌÓ ‰Ó΄Ó, ‰‡Ê ÍÓ„‰‡ ÔËÌËχÂÚÒfl  
ÌÂÒÍÓθÍÓ ‰Û„Ëı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.  
1 Выберите телеканал с  
телетекстом.  
2 Нажмите кнопкуTV/TEXT.  
Нажмите кнопку HOLD  
ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/TEXT ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ÂÊËÏ  
ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:  
Ç Î‚ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ ÛÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
.
Для отмены функции Hold :  
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ HOLD.  
Кнопка REVEAL  
ç‡ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡  
ËÏÂÂÚÒfl ÒÍ˚Ú˚È ÚÂÍÒÚ (̇ÔËÏÂ, ÓÚ‚ÂÚ˚  
̇ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ‚ËÍÚÓËÌ˚).  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì  
ÒÍ˚ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÍÒÚ‡.  
При каждом нажиме на кнопку  
REVEAL текст исчезает или  
появляется.  
3 Выберите страницу телетекста  
с помощью кнопок CHANNEL  
m, кнопок с цифрами или  
цветных кнопок.  
Кнопка SIZE  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Û‚Â΢ÂÌËfl ‚˚ÒÓÚ˚  
‰ËÒÔÎÂfl ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚‰‚ÓÂ.  
Для возврата к режиму ТВ :  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/TEXT ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/  
VIDEO.  
Нажмите кнопку SIZE.  
Кнопка INDEX  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ï„ÌÓ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó  
• ÖÒÎË ‚ÓÁÌË͇˛Ú ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ÔË ÔËÂÏ  
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í  
ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ ËÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ  
ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË.  
‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÒÓ‰ÂʇÌËfl.  
Нажмите кнопку INDEX.  
• Ç ÂÊËÏ íÂÍÒÚ ZOOM Á‡ÙËÍÒËÓ‚‡Ì  
̇ ÂÊËÏ çéêåÄãúçéÖ.  
• Ç ÂÊËÏ ëÔËÒÓÍ ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òfl Í  
ÒÚ‡ÌˈÂ, ÌÓÏÂ ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒfl  
‚ ΂ÓÏ ÌËÊÌÂÏ ÛÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.  
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛  
‚˚ÔÓÎÌflÚ¸ ÌÂθÁfl.  
Кнопка CANCEL  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÒ͇ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.  
• èË Ì‚ÂÌÓÏ ‚˚‚Ӊ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì  
ÒËÏ‚ÓÎÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËÁÏÂÌËÚÂ  
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ.  
èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ҂‰ÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰  
Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” ̇ ÒÚ.  
34.  
1 Нажимая кнопки с цифрами,  
введите номер страницы или  
нажмите цветную кнопку.  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ ËÒ͇ڸ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÛ  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.  
16  
äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
2 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL.  
Использование режима  
Список  
Ç˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸ ÌÓÏÂ‡ Î˛·ËÏ˚ı  
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË Ë ·˚ÒÚÓ  
‚˚Á˚‚‡Ú¸ Ëı ËÁ Ô‡ÏflÚË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚ı  
ÍÌÓÔÓÍ.  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡Ïχ. äÓ‰‡  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇ȉÂÚ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÛ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡,  
 ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ‚ ΂ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ  
ÛÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.  
3 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL для  
возврата к странице  
телетекста, когда ее номер  
появится на экране.  
• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË CANCEL ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òfl  
‚ ÂÊËÏ íÇ ÌÂθÁfl.  
Для сохранения номеров страниц :  
1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для  
входа в режим Список.  
Ç ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÓÚÓ·‡ÁflÚÒfl  
Ëϲ˘ËÂÒfl ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ.  
2 С помощью цветной кнопки  
выберите номер (позицию).  
Затем с помощью кнопок с  
цифрами введите номер  
страницы.  
Кнопка SUBPAGE  
çÂÍÓÚÓ˚ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËÏÂ˛Ú  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÏ˚  
ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚. àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËfl ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ËÎË Â  
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‚ β·ÓÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.  
3 Нажмите и удержите кнопку  
STORE.  
1 Нажмите кнопку SUBPAGE  
для включения функции  
Подстраница.  
óÂÚ˚ ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ·Û‰ÛÚ ÏË„‡Ú¸  
̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ˜ÚÓ Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡  
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌË Ëı ‚ Ô‡ÏflÚË.  
çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒfl ‚  
ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡.  
Для вызова сохраненной страницы :  
1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для  
входа в режим Список.  
Цвет*  
Состояние подстраницы  
ÜÂÎÚ˚È  
ÅÂÎ˚È  
ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ ̇ÒÚÓfl˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ.  
åÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì.  
2 Нажмите цветную кнопку, для  
которой был назначен нужный  
номер страницы.  
ëËÌËÈ ËÎË  
Í‡ÒÌ˚È  
ç ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ ̇  
˝Í‡Ì Ë Ì ÔÓÒ·̇.  
* : ñ‚ÂÚ ÙÓ̇, ̇ ÍÓÚÓÓÏ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒfl  
ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡Ìˈ˚.  
Для выхода из режима Список :  
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MODE  
2 Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL  
m для выбора номера  
подстраницы.  
Для отмены функции Подстраница :  
ÒÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SUBPAGE.  
17  
Как пользоваться меню телевизора  
êfl‰ÓÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÏÂÌ˛.  
óÚÓ·˚ ËÏÂÚ¸ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ‚ÒÂı ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ıÓÓ¯Ó  
Á̇ڸ ÔË̈ËÔ˚ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÂÌ˛.  
Основные операции  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
1 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK для  
PICTURE  
MODE  
вызова МЕНЮ (основного меню).  
ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS  
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
7
RETURN  
MULTI  
• ç‡ ‰ËÒÔΠÒÌËÁÛ ÓÚ ÏÂÌ˛ ÔÓ͇Á‡Ì˚ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl,  
ÍÓÚÓ˚ÏË ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ‰Îfl  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ.  
MUTING  
PIP  
SUB-P  
NEXT  
PIP  
POSITION  
FREEZE  
SWAP  
STROBE  
DISPLAY  
MENU/  
OK  
2 Нажимая кнопки  
/
и
/
выберите название меню, а затем  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÏÂÌ˛.  
SYSTEM  
COLOUR SOUND  
TV/TEXT  
Для возврата к предыдущему меню :  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
HOLD  
MODE  
REVEAL  
SIZE  
SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL  
INDEX  
Для мгновенного выхода из меню :  
TEXT  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO.  
3 С помощью кнопок  
функцию.  
/
выберите  
• ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ Ó ÙÛÌ͈Ëflı ‚  
ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË Ì‡ ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı  
ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı.  
18  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
4 Для выбора настройки этой  
функции используйте кнопки  
/
.
• ÑÎfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËË,  
Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ ÚÓθÍÓ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂÏ,  
ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË Ì‡  
ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÒÚ‡Ìˈ‡ı.  
5 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения настройки.  
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.  
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÂ‰‡˜ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ NTSC  
ÏÂÌ˛ ËÏÂ˛Ú ‡ÁÏÂ ÔÓ ‚ÂÚË͇ÎË ‚‰‚Ó  
ÏÂ̸¯ËÈ ÌÓχθÌÓ„Ó ‡ÁÏÂ‡ ÏÂÌ˛.  
Использование кнопок  
телевизора  
ÑÎfl ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸  
ÍÌÓÔÍË, Ô‰ÛÒÏÓÚÂÌÌ˚ ̇ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ  
Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
кнопки  
OK  
кнопки  
кнопки  
кнопки  
TV/VIDEO  
/
/
MENU  
OK  
CHANEL  
VOLUME TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
• ç‡ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂÚ  
ÍÌÓÔÍË, Ëϲ˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
DISPLAY ËÎË ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË.  
19  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
åÂÌ˛ èÄêÄåÖíêõ  
àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü  
ЯРКО  
üÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.  
: ÚÂÏÌÂÂ  
: Ò‚ÂÚÎÂÂ  
ЧЕТКО  
óÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ  
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.  
: ÏÂ̸¯Â  
: ·Óθ¯Â  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl óÖíäé Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË ÔËÂÏ  
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚ (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).  
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà  
ÑÎfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl  
Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸  
Ó‰ÌÛ ËÁ ÚÂı èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.  
ЦВЕТ  
ñ‚ÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.  
: ·Î‰Ì  
: ÒӘ̠ 
ЯРКИЙ :  
ìÂ΢˂‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë flÍÓÒÚ¸.  
ЦВ.ТОН  
ñ‚ÂÚÓ‚ÓÈ ÚÓÌ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ  
СТАНДАРТ :  
Ñ·ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
“Òڇ̉‡ÚÌ˚ÏË”.  
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.  
: Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È  
: ÁÂÎÂÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È  
МЯГКИЙ :  
• àÁÏÂÌÂÌË ԇ‡ÏÂÚ‡ ñÇ. íéç  
‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓθÍÓ ÔË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË  
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC 3.58 ËÎË NTSC  
4.43.  
ëÏfl„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.  
ìÔ‡‚ÎÂÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËÂÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà  
ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ÓÒÛ˘ÂÒÚ‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÍÌÓÔÍË PICTURE MODE ̇ ÔÛθÚ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ PICTURE MODE” ̇ ÒÚ.  
10.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñÇ. íéç Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË  
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).  
Для возврата к исходным параметрам  
ПРЕДУСТАНОВКИ:  
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ. Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ  
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ‚ ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ  
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‚ÂÌÛÚÒfl Í ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚Ï  
Á̇˜ÂÌËflÏ, ÍÓÚÓ˚ ·Û‰ÛÚ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ˚ Í‡Í  
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.  
ê„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌË  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
è‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ͇ʉÓÈ Ô‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÓËÁ‚ÓθÌÓ ËÁÏÂÌflÚ¸. ÇÌÂÒÂÌÌ˚  
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÒÓı‡ÌflÚÒfl Ë ÒÚ‡ÌÛÚ  
ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé  
Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ‡ÏË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ Ô‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË.  
ÑÎfl „ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË ·‡Î‡ÌÒ‡ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ  
‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÅÄãÄçë  
ÅÖãéÉé (Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÚÓÌÓ‚ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó). èÓÒÍÓθÍÛ  
·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚÒfl Í‡Í ·‡ÁÓ‚˚È ‰Îfl ‚ÒÂı  
ÓÒڇθÌ˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚, ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË ÂÊËχ ÅÄãÄçë  
ÅÖãéÉé ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ Ô‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
̇ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ÒÂı ÓÒڇθÌ˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.  
КОНТРАСТ  
äÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÌÓ  
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.  
: ÏÂ̸¯Â  
: ·Óθ¯Â  
20  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ХОЛОД :  
ÅÂÎ˚È Ò „ÓÎÛ·ËÁÌÓÈ. àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝ÚÓ„Ó  
ÂÊËχ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ flÍËı  
åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ  
àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl  
·ÓΠÊË‚˚ı Ë flÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.  
СРЕДНИЙ :  
çÓχθÌ˚È ·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ.  
ТЕПЛЫЙ :  
ÅÂÎ˚È Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚Ï ÓÚÚÂÌÍÓÏ.  
àÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ÔË  
ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ÙËθÏÓ‚ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl ·ÓΠÔÓ‰ıÓ‰fl˘Ëı ‰Îfl ÙËθÏÓ‚  
ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.  
ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò ÒÌËʇÂÚ  
ÔÓÏÂıË, ËÒ͇ʇ˛˘Ë ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ  
·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚ ÂÊËÏ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË” ËÎË ‚ ÂÊËÏ 16:9  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË ZOOM (ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl χүڇ·‡  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl).  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ  
ÔË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).  
АВТО :  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË „ÛÎËÛÂÚ  
ÛÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË  
ÒÓ ÒÚÂÔÂ̸˛ ÔÓÏÂı Ë Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ Ì‡ËÎÛ˜¯Â  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.  
ñàîêéÇéâ  
ùäéëÖçëéê  
èË ‚˚·Ó ñàîêéÇéÉâ ùäéëÖçëéê  
ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË „ÛÎËÛÂÚÒfl  
‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò flÍÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÒ‚Â˘ÂÌËfl ‚  
ÍÓÏ̇ÚÂ. ùÚÓ ÒÌËʇÂÚ Ì‡ÔflÊÂÌË „·Á Ë  
ÔÓÚ·ÎflÂÏÛ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ  
• ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍËÈ  
ÛÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò,  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÏÓÊÂÚ ÒÚ‡Ú¸ ̘ÂÚÍËÏ.  
êÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ  
ÄÇíé.  
˝ÎÂÍÚÓ˝ÌÂ„˲.  
МАКС :  
ВКЛ :  
ìÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl  
̇ χÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË Ë ÔÓÒΠ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl  
ÂÊËχ ÄÇíé ËϲÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË,  
чÌ̇fl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ВЫКЛ :  
чÌ̇fl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åÄäë.  
• ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ åÄäë Ì ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îfl  
‚˚ÒÓÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò  
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.  
ДИСПЛЕЙ :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl. èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ  
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË flÍÓÒÚË ‚ ÍÓÏ̇Ú ̇ ÌÂÒÍÓθÍÓ  
МИН :  
ÒÂÍÛ̉ ÔÓfl‚Îfl˛ÚÒfl Á̇˜ÍË  
Ó·ÓÁ̇˜‡˛˘Ë flÍÓÒÚ¸. óÂÏ ÚÂÏÌ ‚  
ÍÓÏ̇ÚÂ, ÚÂÏ ·Óθ¯Â ˜ËÒÎÓ Á̇˜ÍÓ‚.  
,
ìÓ‚Â̸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl  
̇ ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÂÊËχ  
ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÒÚ‡ÎÓ Ì‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ  
˜ÂÚÍËÏ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åàç.  
• ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ åàç Ì ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îfl  
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò  
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.  
21  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
МИН :  
DigiPure  
ìÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl ̇  
ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure ̇  
ÄÇíé ËϲÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÂÂȉËÚ ̇ åàç.  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl Digipure ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÚ ÌÓ‚ÂÈ¯Û˛  
ˆËÙÓ‚Û˛ ÚÂıÌÓÎӄ˲ ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl  
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. îÛÌ͈Ëfl  
Digipure ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚ ‰‚ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË.  
• êÂÊËÏ åàç Ì ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‰Îfl  
‚˚ÒÓÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ÒÓ  
Ò··˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.  
Функция Digipure :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÒÔÓÒÓ·ÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÒÓÁ‰‡Ì˲  
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÔÛÚÂÏ  
Û‰‡ÎÂÌËfl Î˯ÌËı Í‡Â‚˚ı ÁÓÌ  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl DigiPure ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
‚˚ÒÓÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı Ë ˜ÂÚÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.  
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÌËÁÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ  
Í‡Â‚˚ ÁÓÌ˚ ‰Ó·‡‚Îfl˛ÚÒfl ‰Îfl ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl  
·ÓΠ˜ÂÚÍÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
îÛÌÍˆË˛ DigiPure ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ‚  
ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé, åÄäë Ë åàç.  
PULL DOWN  
ÇÍβ˜ÂÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌ͈ËË PULL DOWN  
‰ÓÒÚË„‡ÂÚÒfl ·ÓΠ˜ÂÚÍÓÂ Ë ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ  
¯ËÓÍÓÙÓχÚÌ˚ı ÍËÌÓÙËθÏÓ‚.  
Функция компенс ации движения  
изображения :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ·ÓΠÔ·‚ÌÛ˛ Ë  
ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÛ˛ ÔÂ‰‡˜Û ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ·˚ÒÚÓ  
‰‚ËÊÛ˘ËıÒfl ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Ú‡ÍËı Í‡Í  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÙÛÚ·ÓÎËÒÚÓ‚ Ë Ïfl˜‡.  
АВТО:  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇. Ç Ó·˚˜ÌÓÏ ÂÊËÏ  
‡·ÓÚ˚ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰ÓÎÊ̇ ·˚Ú¸  
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ Ì‡ ÄÇíé.  
ВЫКЛ:  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl Digipure Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË  
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).  
• Ñ‚ËÊÂÌË ӷ˙ÂÍÚÓ‚ ÏÓÊÂÚ Í‡Á‡Ú¸Òfl  
ÌÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚Ï ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË  
NTSC. óÚÓ·˚ Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ¸ ·ÓΠÔ·‚ÌÓ  
‰‚ËÊÂÌËÂ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ PULL  
DOWN Ò ÄÇíé ̇ Çõäã.  
АВТО :  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÛÂÚ  
ÛÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò ÛÓ‚ÌÂÏ  
ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËÈ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ë Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ËÚ  
̇ËÎÛ˜¯Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.  
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚  
ÂÊËÏ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” Ë ‚  
ÂÊËÏ “ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË”.  
• èË ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍÓÏ ÛÓ‚Ì DigiPure Ë  
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓÏ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË Ò  
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓ„ÛÚ  
¢ ·Óθ¯Â ÛÒËÎËÚ¸Òfl. êÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé.  
МАКС :  
ìÓ‚Â̸ DigiPure ÛÒڇ̇‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒfl ̇  
χÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒΠÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure ̇  
ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÔÂ‰‡ÂÚÒfl Ì ÒÓ‚ÒÂÏ  
ÔÓÎÌÓ, ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé ̇ åÄäë.  
• êÂÊËÏ åÄäë Ì ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â  
ÌËÁÍÓ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ò  
ÒËθÌ˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.  
22  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
2 Нажимайте кнопки для  
/
ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà  
выбора режима ZOOM. Затем  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ‡Ò¯ËËÚÒfl, ‡ ̇Á‚‡ÌË  
‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ZOOM ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒfl ̇  
˝Í‡Ì ‚ Ú˜ÂÌË ÓÍÓÎÓ 5 ÒÂÍÛ̉.  
ëËÒÚÂχ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒfl  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË. é‰Ì‡ÍÓ ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË  
ÌÂflÒÌÓ ËÎË Ìˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ  
ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.  
1 Выберите СИСТЕМА  
ЦВЕТНОСТИ и нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
• àϲÚÒfl ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÂÊËÏ˚ :  
çéêåÄãúçéÖ, ZOOM Ë 16:9. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“äÌÓÔ͇ ZOOM” ̇ ÒÚ. 9.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ZOOM Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË  
ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P).  
PICTURE TILT  
2 С помощью кнопок  
/
àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËflÌËfl χ„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎfl ÁÂÏÎË  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÂÂÍÓÒËÚ¸Òfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ  
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÊÌÓ ÓÚÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸  
выберите нужную систему  
цветности. Затем нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË.  
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ëàëíÖåA  
ñÇÖíçéëíà ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌË  
ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 15.  
1 Выберите PICTURETILT и  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
• îÛÌ͈ËÂÈ ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà  
ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛθڇ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇ ÒÚ. 11.  
2 Нажимайте кнопки  
пор, пока перекос не  
/
до тех  
ZOOM  
устранится. Затем нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÙÓχڇ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl  
ÍÓ˝ÙÙˈËÂÌÚ‡ ÔÓÔÓˆËÓ̇θÌÓÒÚË.  
Ç˚·ÂËÚ ÓÔÚËχθÌ˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.  
1 Выберите ZOOM и нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
23  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
åÂÌ˛  
èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà áÇìäÄ  
БАЛАНС  
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ·‡Î‡ÌÒ ÏÂÊ‰Û Î‚˚Ï  
Ë Ô‡‚˚Ï „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎflÏË.  
: Û‚Â΢ÂÌË „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË ÎÂ‚Ó„Ó  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎfl.  
: Û‚Â΢ÂÌË „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Ô‡‚Ó„Ó  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎfl.  
AI ìêéÇÖçú  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
Ô‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËfl ÂÁÍÓ„Ó Û‚Â΢ÂÌËfl ËÎË  
ÛÏÂ̸¯ÂÌËfl ÛÓ‚Ìfl „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË ÔË  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ Ë ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËË  
Ò Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËχ ÇàÑÖé ̇ ‰Û„ÓÈ.  
ëíÖêÖé / I•II  
èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË  
üÁ˚Í I (Sub I) ËÎË üÁ˚Í II (Sub II). èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ  
ÔËÂÏ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎflˆËË ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚ¸Òfl ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îfl  
ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËfl ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚Û͇.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇.  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇.  
: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËfl  
: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËfl  
: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òfl  
ÓÚ‰ÂθÌÓ ‰Îfl ÂÊËχ íÇ Ë ÂÊËχ  
ÇàÑÖé.  
ç‡ÔËÏÂ, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸  Çõäã ‚  
ÂÊËÏ íÇ Ë Çäã ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.  
ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ AI ìêéÇÖçú  
ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ˜ÂÂÁ  
Ô‡ÌÂθ ÇàÑÖé, ˝Ú‡ ÛÒÚ‡Ìӂ͇  
Á‡„ËÒÚËÛÂÚÒfl Í‡Í Ì‡ÒÚÓÈ͇  
ÂÊËχ ÇàÑÖé.  
: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)  
МОНО : éÚÏÂÌflÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ  
ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒfl ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ.  
• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËfl Á‡‚ËÒflÚ  
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ Ì ‰‡‚‡Ú¸  
ÌÛÊÌ˚ı ÂÁÛθڇÚÓ‚ ÔË Ó˜Â̸ ÌËÁÍÓÏ  
ÛÓ‚ÌÂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó  
• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ì ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËχı  
ÇàÑÖé.  
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl, ÔÂ‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó  
ÚÂ΂ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ Òڇ̈ËÂÈ (ËÎË  
Á‡‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌ˚Ï  
ê„ÛÎËӂ͇ Á‚Û͇  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÁ‚ÓθÌÓ„Ó  
„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl Á‚Û͇.  
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËÂÏ ‚ˉÂÓÒËÒÚÂÏ˚).  
BBE  
БАС  
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÌËÊÌË ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚ Á‚Û͇.  
: Ò··Â  
: ÒËθÌ  
îÛÌÍˆË˛ ÇÇÖ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îfl  
ÔÓÒÚÓ„Ó Ôˉ‡ÌËfl Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÏÛ  
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌ˲ ı‡‡ÍÚÂËÒÚËÍ ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó,  
ÌÂÒÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓ„Ó Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó  
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl.  
ТЕМБР  
åÓÊÌÓ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‚ÂıÌË ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚  
Á‚Û͇.  
: Ò··Â  
: ÒËθÌ  
24  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
1 Выберите НАУЩНИКИ и  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
Система BBE используется по лицензии  
компании ВВE Sound, Inc. ВВЕ является  
зарегистрированной торговой маркой  
компании BBE Sound, inc.  
2 С помощью кнопки  
сделайте выбор, а с помощью  
кнопки установите  
/
SPATIALIZER  
/
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound  
(ÓÍÛʇ˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).  
функцию НАУЩНИКИ.  
Нажмите кнопку OK, а затем  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ‰‚Ûı ÂÊËÏÓ‚  
SPATIALIZER.  
ГРОМКОСТЬ :  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl  
„ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.  
• åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı  
ÂÊËÏÓ‚ SPATIALIZER: LIVE, MOçO ËÎË  
Çõäã.  
TV ГРОМКОГОВОР :  
äÓ‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÌÂ˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒ‡ÊÂÔË  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚. ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡  
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜Â̇, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı  
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ‚˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒfl.  
ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ì ‚˚Íβ˜‡˛ÚÒfl ‰‡Ê ÔË  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.  
ÖÒÎË ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛,  
ÅÓΠÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ SPATIALIZER” ̇ ÒÚ. 9.  
Система SPATIALIZER изготовлена по  
лицензии компании Desper Products,Inc.  
ëìèÖê ÅÄë  
ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëÛÔÂ ŇÒ.  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÚÒfl  
ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ВЫХОД :  
ВЫКЛ :  
èË ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ Á‚Û͇ Í‡Í  
éëçéÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÉãABH) ËÎË  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË  
(BTOPOCTEè).  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
çÄìôçàäà  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸  
ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËfl Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl  
˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.  
• á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
ÌÂθÁfl ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
• èË ‚˚‚Ӊ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì Ù‡„ÏÂÌÚ‡  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓθÍÓ  
ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚‰ÂÌËÂ,  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËË ëíÖêÖé/I•II  
·Û‰ÂÚ Ì‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚Ï.  
25  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÌÂθÁfl  
ÓÚÍβ˜ËÚ¸ ÒÂÚ‚Ó ÔËÚ‡ÌË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ  
äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜Â̇, ÏÓÊÌÓ  
‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛ íÄâåÖê ÇõäãûóÖçàü  
‰Îfl ÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂʉÂÌËfl ËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl  
ÓÒÚ‡‚¯Â„ÓÒfl ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.  
ëàçàâ îéç  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó  
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇ ÒËÌËÈ Ë  
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl Á‚Û͇ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â Ò··Ó„Ó ËÎË  
ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Â„Ó Ò˄̇·, ËÎË Ê  
‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË Ì ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÒË„Ì‡Î Ò  
‚̯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡.  
íÄâåÖê  
ÇõäãûóÖçàü  
åÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ÓÔ‰ÂÎÂÌÌÓ ‚ÂÏfl.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
1 Выберите ТАЙМЕР  
ВЫКЛЮЧЕНИЯ и нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌËfl  
ÔÂ‰ÌËı ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. äÓ‰‡ ˝Ú‡  
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂ̇ ̇ Çäã, ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎflÚ¸ ÚÓθÍÓ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔÛθڇ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.  
àÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ‰Îfl  
Ô‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËfl ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ  
‰ÂÚ¸ÏË (·ÂÁ ‡Á¯ÂÌËfl Ó‰ËÚÂÎÂÈ).  
2 С помощью кнопок  
/
установите период времени.  
íÈÏÂ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ̇˜ÌÂÚ ÓÚÒ˜ÂÚ  
Á‡‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
• åÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂËÓ‰ ‚ÂÏÂÌË  
‰ÎËÚÂθÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ‰Ó 120 ÏËÌÛÚ (2 ˜‡Ò‡)  
ÔË‡˘ÂÌËflÏË ÔÓ 10 ÏËÌÛÚ.  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
Для отмены этой функции:  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ‰Îfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË “Çõäã”.  
àÑ çéåÖê  
ÖÒÎË Ç˚ Ì ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ‰ÂÚË ÒÏÓÚÂÎË  
ÓÔ‰ÂÎÂÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ‚˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ  
Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.  
ÖÒÎË ·ÂÌÓÍ ‚˚·ÂÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,  
ÔËÒ‚ÓÂÌÌ˚È Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓÏÛ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ, ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë Ì‡ ÌÂÏ  
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÒËÏ‚ÓΠ, Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË  
ÌÂθÁfl ·Û‰ÂÚ ‚ˉÂÚ¸.  
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения установки.  
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.  
• ᇠӉÌÛ ÏËÌÛÚÛ ‰Ó ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇‰ÔËÒ¸  
“ëèéäéâçéâ çéóà!”.  
26  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
Как включить эту  
функцию  
1 Выберите ИД НОМЕР затем  
нажмите кнопку 0 (AV).  
Для просмотра  
заблокированного  
телеканала  
1 Выберите номер программы с  
заблокированным  
телеканалом с помощью  
кнопок с цифрами или списка  
ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.  
ùÍ‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
çéåÖê).  
(àÑ  
2 Установите ИД номер.  
Для выбора номера:  
/
̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
.
• ᇷÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌÂθÁfl  
‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ  
/
.
Для перемещения курсора:  
/
̇ÊËχÈÚ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
.
2 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для  
вызова на экранИД НОМЕР.  
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
3 Введите ИД номер с помощью  
кнопок с цифрами.  
ÅÎÓÍËӂ͇ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÂ̇, Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ  
ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸  
Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.  
4 Нажимайте кнопки  
выбора телеканала.  
/
для  
Если Вы забыли ИД номер :  
Ç˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ˝Ú‡Ô 1, ˜ÚÓ·˚ “ä‡Í ‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸  
˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”. èÓÒΠÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂʉÂÌËfl àÑ  
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îfl  
‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛.  
• ç‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ÔÓ„‡Ïχ, ÍÓÚÓ‡fl  
‚ ̇ÒÚÓfl˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ Ú‡ÌÒÎËÛÂÚÒfl ÔÓ  
‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÏÛ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ.  
5 Нажмите синюю кнопку для  
включения этой функции для  
данного телеканала.  
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê  
ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÌÓ‚‡ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ¸ ˝Ú‡Ô “ä‡Í  
‚Íβ˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”.  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl  
(àÑ çéåÖê) Ë ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π 
·Û‰ÂÚ Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.  
Для отмены этой функции :  
ëÌÓ‚‡ ̇ÊÏËÚ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ.  
(àÑ çéåÖê) ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ Ë ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π 
·Û‰ÂÚ ‡Á·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.  
6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения установки.  
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.  
27  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó  
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË  
‚¢‡ÌËfl, Ú.Â. ÂÒÎË ÓÌ Ì ÔËÌËχÂÚ Ò˄̇·  
‚ Ú˜ÂÌË ÓÍÓÎÓ 15 ÏËÌÛÚ.  
ВКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
ВЫКЛ :  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ Ì  
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ÓÚÍβ˜ÂÌËfl ÒÂÚÂ‚Ó„Ó  
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ Ì  
‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.  
VIDEO-3  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ Ô‡‚ËθÌÛ˛  
̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ VIDEO-3, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛  
ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘ÂÏÛ ÓÚ ‚̯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡,  
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3, ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÛ. èË  
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓÈ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl Ì  
·Û‰ÂÚ.  
ВИДЕО :  
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÌÓχθÌ˚È  
(ÔÓÎÌ˚È) ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î.  
КОМПОНЕНТHЫЙ :  
Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È  
B
R
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Π(Y/C /C ).  
• èÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÔÓ  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËflÏ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ” ̇  
ÒÚ. 36.  
• чÌÌ˚È ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò  
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ (Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚  
525P) ÚÓθÍÓ ÔË ÔÓ‰‡˜Â ̇ ‚ıÓ‰  
ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇·.  
28  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
åÂÌ˛ HÄCTPéâäà  
• ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ.  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
2 После сохранения  
телеканалов в списке номеров  
программ появится меню  
НАСТРОЙКА.  
üáõä  
åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ flÁ˚Í ÏÂÌ˛ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇  
flÁ˚ÍÓ‚.  
1 Выберите ЯЗЫК и нажмите  
кнопку MENU/OK.  
OK  
TV  
DISP  
2 Нажимайте кнопки  
выбора языка.  
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения установки.  
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.  
/
для  
• èÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ ‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸  
ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË  
çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.  
• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ΠÌ ·˚Î  
ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ,  
Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” ̇ ÒÚ. 30.  
ÄÇíé èêéÉ.  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓÈ  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Û‚ÂÂÌÌÓ ÔËÌËχÂÏ˚ı  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ. ÑÎfl  
˝ÚÓ„Ó ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ.  
• îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ. Ì ÒÓı‡ÌflÂÚ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ̇ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0  
(AV).  
1 Выберите АВТО ПРОГ. и  
нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
ÇÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÄÇíé èêéÉ.  
èËÌËχÂÏ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ·Û‰ÛÚ  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌflÚ¸Òfl ‚ ÒÔËÒÍ  
ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.  
• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû Ì  
ÌÛÊ̇, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK ‰Îfl  
‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.  
29  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ИД :  
çÄëíêéâäÄ/  
Çêìóçìû  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl „ËÒÚËÛÂÚ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌË  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· (àÑ).  
îÛÌ͈ËË çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‰ÂÎflÚÒfl ̇  
‰‚‡ ÚËÔ‡:  
ВСТАВКА :  
‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌË ÚÂÍÛ˘Ëı ÌÓÏÂÓ‚  
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl çÄëíêéâäÄ) Ë ۘ̇fl  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ‚ ÒÔËÒÓÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚  
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl êìóçÄü).  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ‰Ó·‡‚ÎflÂÚ ÌÓ‚˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Í  
ÚÂÍÛ˘ÂÏÛ ÒÔËÒÍÛ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÛÚÂÏ  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC.  
УДАЛИТЬ :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Û‰‡ÎflÂÚ ÌÂÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.  
ВНИМАНИЕ  
• Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ  
ìèêÄÇã, ìÑÄãàíú ËÎË ÇëíÄÇäÄ  
РУЧНАЯ :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ Û˜ÌÛ˛  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÓ‚Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÔÓ‰  
ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.  
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ÔÂÂÁ‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌË ÚÂÍÛ˘Â„Ó  
ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.  
Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ  
ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚ ËÁÏÂÌflÚÒfl.  
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения настройки.  
• ÑÎfl ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ êR 0 ‚  
ÒÔËÒÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÓfl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl “AV”.  
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π·˚Î Á‡ÔÂÚ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË  
ÙÛÌ͈ËË êìóçÄü ‰Îfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·  
ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ÓÚÏÂÌ ÙÛÌ͈ËË àÑ çéåÖê.  
• ÖÒÎË ‰Îfl ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ èê 99  
ÛÊ ̇Á̇˜ÂÌ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË  
ÇëíÄÇäÄ Ô˂‰ÂÚ Í ÒÚË‡Ì˲ ˝ÚÓ„Ó  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.  
ФУНКЦИИ  
УПРАВЛ  
1 Нажимайте кнопки  
выбора телеканала.  
/
для  
1 Выберите НАСТРОЙКА/  
ВРУЧНУЮ и нажмите кнопку  
MENU/OK.  
2 Нажмите кнопку для  
включения функции УПРАВЛ.  
2 Используйте функцию  
согласно ее описанию.  
3 С помощью кнопок  
/
выберите новый номер  
программы.  
УПРАВЛ :  
ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ËÁÏÂÌflÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.  
Для отмены функции УПРАВЛ :  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
30  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
РУЧНАЯ  
1 Нажимайте кнопки  
4 Нажмите кнопку для  
изменения номера программы  
телеканала.  
/
для  
выбора номера программы,  
под которым Вы хотите  
зарегистрировать новый  
телеканал.  
ИД  
1 Нажимайте кнопки  
выбора телеканала.  
/
для  
2 Нажмите синюю кнопку для  
включения функции РУЧНАЯ.  
2 Нажмите красную кнопку для  
включения функции ИД.  
3 Введите название телеканала  
(ИД).  
ë Ô‡‚ÓÈ ÒÚÓÓÌ˚ ÓÚ ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC  
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ëàëíÖåÄ (ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó  
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl) ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·.  
Пользуйтесь кнопками  
для выбора знаков.  
/
Пользуйтесь кнопками  
/
для перемещения курсора.  
Для отмены функции РУЧНАЯ :  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
3 Нажимайте кнопку для  
выбора телевещательной  
системы (системы звукового  
сопровождения) для  
Для отмены функции ИД:  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
4 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для регистрации названия  
телеканала.  
регистрируемого телеканала.  
• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‰Îfl  
‡Á΢Ì˚ı „ËÓÌÓ‚ Ë ÒÚ‡Ì Ô˂‰ÂÌ˚  
‚ Ú‡·Îˈ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ  
УДАЛИТЬ  
ëàëíÖåõ” ̇ ÒÚ. 12.  
1 Нажимайте кнопки  
выбора телеканала.  
2 Нажмите желтую кнопку для  
удаления телеканала.  
/
для  
4 Нажмите зеленую или красную  
кнопку для поиска  
телеканала.  
ë͇ÌËÓ‚‡ÌË ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl, ÍÓ‡  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π·Û‰ÂÚ Ì‡È‰ÂÌ. ùÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π 
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ̇ ˝Í‡ÌÂ.  
ä̇Π·Û‰ÂÚ Û‰‡ÎÂÌ ËÁ ÒÔËÒ͇ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚  
ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.  
31  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
5 Нажимайте зеленую или  
красную кнопку до тех пор,  
пока не появится нужный  
телеканал.  
3 С помощью кнопок  
/
выберитеCC” или “CH”  
согласно номеру CH/CC  
телеканала.  
При плохом приеме телеканала :  
ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒËÌÂÈ ËÎË ÊÂÎÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË  
‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ ÚÓÌÍÛ˛ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ Ì‡ ˝ÚÓÚ  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î.  
Для отмены функции ВСТАВКА :  
ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.  
4 С помощью кнопок с цифрами  
введите оставшийся номер CH/  
CC.  
Если не удается получить нормальное  
звуковое сопровождение даже при  
нормальном изображении :  
ùÚÓ Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡ ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÛ˛  
̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ ëàëíÖåA. ç‡ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ  
Ë ‚˚·ÂËÚ ëàëíÖåA Ò ÌÓχθÌ˚Ï  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚˚Ï ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂÏ.  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË. èÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË  
„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.  
• çÓÏÂ CH/CC Û͇Á˚‚‡ÂÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚÛ, ̇  
ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ‚‰ÂÚÒfl ÚÂ΂¢‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ì ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó·Ì‡ÛÊËÚ¸  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ  
ÚÂ΂¢‡ÌËfl, Ó·ÓÁ̇˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ  
CH/CC, ÔÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Á‡ÒÚ‡‚͇, Û͇Á˚‚‡˛˘‡fl  
̇ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Ë Ò˄̇·.  
6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для регистрации телеканала  
под номером программы.  
èÓfl‚ËÚÒfl Ó·˚˜ÌÓ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.  
ВСТАВКА  
ПОДГОТОВКА  
• ç‡È‰ËÚ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,  
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÌÓÏÂÛ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·, ‚  
Ú‡·Î. ̇ ÒÚ. 33.  
1 Нажимайте кнопки  
/
для  
выбора номера программы,  
под которым регистрируется  
новый телеканал.  
2 Нажмите зеленую кнопку для  
включения функции ВСТАВКА.  
32  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
Номер CH/CC  
ÖÒÎË Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ÇëíÄÇäÄ, ÓÔËÒ‡Ì̇fl ̇ ÒÚ. 32, ̇ȉËÚ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,  
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÛ, ÔÓ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ Ú‡·ÎˈÂ.  
US: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ëòÄ, ̇ îËÎËÔÔË̇ı Ë Ú.‰.  
CCIR: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ̇ ÅÎËÊÌÂÏ ÇÓÒÚÓÍÂ, ‚ û„Ó-ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ ÄÁËË Ë Ú.‰.  
OIRT: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ Ö‚ÓÔÂ, êÓÒÒËË, ǸÂÚ̇ÏÂ Ë Ú.‰.  
AUSTRALIA: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓθÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ Ä‚ÒÚ‡ÎËË Ë Ú.‰.  
ä̇Π 
ä̇Π 
CH  
US  
CCIR  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
E9  
OIRT  
AUSTRALIA  
AU-0  
AU-1  
AU-2  
AU-6  
AU-7  
AU-8  
AU-9  
CC  
US  
CCIR  
S-1  
S-2  
OIRT  
AUSTRALIA  
CH 02  
CH 03  
CH 04  
CH 05  
CH 06  
CH 07  
CH 08  
CH 09  
CH 10  
CH 11  
CH 12  
CH 13  
CH 14  
CH 15  
CH 16  
CH 17  
CH 18  
CH 19  
CH 20  
CH 21  
CH 22  
CH 23  
CH 24  
CH 25  
CH 26  
CH 27  
CH 28  
CH 29  
CH 30  
CH 31  
CH 32  
CH 33  
CH 34  
CH 35  
CH 36  
CH 37  
CH 38  
CH 39  
CH 40  
CH 41  
CH 42  
CH 43  
CH 44  
CH 45  
CH 46  
CH 47  
CH 48  
CH 49  
CH 50  
CH 51  
CH 52  
CH 53  
CH 54  
CH 55  
CH 56  
CH 57  
CH 58  
CH 59  
CH 60  
CH 61  
CH 62  
CH 63  
CH 64  
CH 65  
CH 66  
CH 67  
CH 68  
CH 69  
CH 70  
US-2  
R1  
CC 01  
CC 02  
CC 03  
CC 04  
CC 05  
CC 06  
CC 07  
CC 08  
CC 09  
CC 10  
CC 11  
CC 12  
CC 13  
CC 14  
CC 15  
CC 16  
CC 17  
CC 18  
CC 19  
CC 20  
CC 21  
CC 22  
CC 23  
CC 24  
CC 25  
CC 26  
CC 27  
CC 28  
CC 29  
CC 30  
CC 31  
CC 32  
CC 33  
CC 34  
CC 35  
CC 36  
CC 37  
CC 38  
CC 39  
CC 40  
CC 41  
CC 42  
CC 43  
CC 44  
CC 45  
CC 46  
CC 47  
CC 48  
CC 49  
CC 50  
CC 51  
CC 52  
CC 53  
CC 54  
CC 55  
CC 56  
CC 57  
CC 58  
CC 59  
CC 60  
CC 61  
CC 62  
CC 63  
CC 64  
CC 75  
CC 76  
CC 77  
CC 78  
CC 79  
CC 95  
CC 96  
CC 97  
CC 98  
CC 99  
AU-5  
US-3  
US-4  
US-5  
US-6  
US-7  
US-8  
US-9  
R2  
R6  
R7  
R8  
R9  
S-3  
S-4  
S-5  
S-6  
AU-5A  
S-7  
S-8  
US-10  
US-11  
US-12  
US-13  
US-14  
US-15  
US-16  
US-17  
US-18  
US-19  
US-20  
US-21  
US-22  
US-23  
US-24  
US-25  
US-26  
US-27  
US-28  
US-29  
US-30  
US-31  
US-32  
US-33  
US-34  
US-35  
US-36  
US-37  
US-38  
US-39  
US-40  
US-41  
US-42  
US-43  
US-44  
US-45  
US-46  
US-47  
US-48  
US-49  
US-50  
US-51  
US-52  
US-53  
US-54  
US-55  
US-56  
US-57  
US-58  
US-59  
US-60  
US-61  
US-62  
US-63  
US-64  
US-65  
US-66  
US-67  
US-68  
US-69  
E10  
E11  
E12  
R10  
R11  
R12  
AU-10  
AU-11  
S-9  
S-10  
S-11  
S-12  
S-13  
S-14  
S-15  
S-16  
S-17  
S-18  
S-19  
S-20  
S-21  
S-22  
S-23  
S-24  
S-25  
S-26  
S-27  
S-28  
S-29  
S-30  
S-31  
S-32  
S-33  
S-34  
S-35  
S-36  
S-37  
S-38  
S-39  
S-40  
S-41  
A
B
C
D
E
F
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
E61  
E62  
E63  
E64  
E65  
E66  
E67  
E68  
E69  
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W+1  
W+2  
W+3  
W+4  
W+5  
W+6  
W+7  
W+8  
W+9  
W+10  
W+11  
W+12  
W+13  
W+14  
W+15  
W+16  
W+17  
W+18  
W+19  
W+20  
W+21  
W+22  
W+23  
W+24  
W+25  
W+26  
W+27  
W+28  
X
Y
Z
Z+1  
Z+2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
AU-3  
AU-4  
A-5  
A-4  
A-3  
A-2  
A-1  
33  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения настройки.  
åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.  
üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ  
àÏÂÂÚÒfl 4 „ÛÔÔ˚ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡. Ç˚·ÂËÚ  
„ÛÔÔÛ, ÍÓÚÓ‡fl ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ flÁ˚ÍÛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ÍÓÚÓÛ˛ ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸.  
• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ „ÛÔÔ˚ flÁ˚ÍÓ‚, ‚  
ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÌÂÚ flÁ˚͇ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ  
ÌÓχθÌÓ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡Ú¸Òfl.  
1 Выберите ЯЗЫКТЕЛЕТЕКСТА  
и нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.  
2 Нажмите кнопки  
выбора группы.  
/
для  
Группа  
Языки  
Турецкий, венгерский,  
английский, немецкий,  
французский, итальянский,  
испанский, португальский,  
греческий, шведский,  
финский  
ГPУППА-1  
Польский, сербский,  
хорватский, словенский,  
чешский, словацкий,  
румынский, венгерский,  
немецкий, французский,  
итальянский, шведский,  
финский  
ГPУППА-2  
ГPУППА-3  
Русский, болгарский,  
латышский, литовский,  
эстонский, украинский,  
сербский, хорватский,  
словенский, чешский,  
словацкий, английский,  
немецкий  
Арабский, чешский,  
словацкий, венгерский,  
английский, немецкий,  
французский,  
итальянский, испанский,  
португальский, шведский,  
финский  
ГPУППА-4  
34  
ä‡Í ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
åÂÌ˛ ÑÖåé  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÑÖåé Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÛ˛ ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı  
ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
Когда функция ДЕМО  
установлена на ВКЛ :  
ÔË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
̇˜Ë̇ÂÚÒfl ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒ͇fl ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl.  
ÖÒÎË ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl Ì Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl,  
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÑÖåé ̇ Çõäã.  
1 Нажмите кнопку  
выбора ВКЛ.  
/
для  
ÑÎfl ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÑÖåé ‚˚·ÂËÚ  
Çõäã.  
2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK  
для завершения настройки.  
îÛÌ͈Ëfl ÑÖåé ‚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl, ‚  
ÂÁÛθڇÚ ̇˜ÌÂÚÒfl ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËfl.  
Для отмены демонстрации:  
̇ÊÏËÚ β·Û˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔÛθڇ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.  
35  
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ПОДГОТОВКА  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË  
‚̯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÈÚÂ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ ‚̯ÌË  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÈ  
ÒıÂÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl.  
Перед выполнением любого  
подсоединения :  
• èÓ˜ÚËÚ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó Í ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÏ˚Ï  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï. ëÔÓÒÓ· ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl  
Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ ÍÓÌÍÂÚÌ˚ı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ Ë ÏÓÊÂÚ  
·˚Ú¸ ÓÚ΢Ì˚Ï ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡, ÔÓ͇Á‡ÌÌÓ„Ó  
̇ ÒıÂÏÂ. äÓÏ ÚÓ„Ó, ‰Îfl Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËfl  
ÌÓχθÌÓÈ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÚ·ӂ‡Ú¸Òfl  
ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ ‚  
Á‡‚ËÒËÏÓÒÚË ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡ ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl.  
• Ç˚Íβ˜ËÚ ‚Ò ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒΠ 
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.  
• Ç ‡Á‰ÂΠ“íÂıÌ˘ÂÒÍË ‰‡ÌÌ˚” ̇ ÒÚ.  
43 ÒÓ‰ÂÊËÚÒfl ËÌÙÓχˆËfl Ó Ô‡ÌÂÎflı  
ÇàÑÖé. Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËfl  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, Ì ‚Íβ˜ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ‚  
Ô˂‰ÂÌÌ˚È ÌËÊ ÒÔËÒÓÍ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸  
Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “íÂıÌ˘ÂÒÍË ‰‡ÌÌ˚” ‰Îfl  
‚˚·Ó‡ ̇˷ÓΠÔÓ‰ıÓ‰fl˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË  
ÇàÑÖé.  
• àÏÂÈÚ ‚‚ˉÛ, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚÂθÌ˚  
͇·ÂÎË Ì ‚ıÓ‰flÚ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË.  
• èË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,  
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK,  
Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚, ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU  
LINK” ̇ ÒÚ. 38.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Çå (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)  
Çå (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)  
Çå ‰Îfl Á‡ÔËÒË (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)  
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)  
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)  
DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚  
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚; Y/CB/CR  
)
7
8
9
0
-
íÇ-Ë„‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)  
íÇ-Ë„‡ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)  
ÇˉÂÓ͇ÏÂ‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È Ò˄̇Î)  
ÇˉÂÓ͇ÏÂ‡ (Ò˄̇ΠS-VIDEO; Y/C)  
ÉÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚  
A
ä·Âθ AV COMPU LINK  
36  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ  
Подсоединение устройства  
через панель VIDEO-3/COMPO-  
NENT с помощью видеокабеля :  
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó Y/VIDEO ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ë  
„ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO OUT (‚ˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ Ì ӉÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ VIDEO-3 ̇ ÇàÑÖé  
ÒÓ·ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “VIDEO-3” ̇ ÒÚ. 28.  
Способы подсоединения  
1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO  
телевизора с гнездом VIDEO  
OUT (видеовыход) устройства  
с помощью видеокабеля.  
Подсоединение устройства к  
телевизору с помощью кабеля  
S-VIDEO :  
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT (‚˚ıÓ‰ S-  
VIDEO) ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ Ò ‡Á˙ÂÏÓÏ “S”  
(S-VIDEO) ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl S-  
VIDEO, ‡ Ì ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
àÏÂÈÚ ‚‚ˉÛ, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÂÒÎË  
ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå Ò ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ Í‡Í Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl, Ú‡Í Ë Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
͇·ÂÎfl S-VIDEO.  
• ç‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-4 „ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO  
Ó·ÓÁ̇˜ÂÌÓ Í‡Í “V”.  
2 Соединение аудиогнезд AUDIO  
(L/MONO и R) телевизора и  
гнезд AUDIO OUT (аудиовыход  
L/R) с помощью аудиокабелей.  
Если звуковой сигнал  
устройства является  
монофоническим :  
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO OUT ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò  
„ÌÂÁ‰ÓÏ L/MONO ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
‡Û‰ËÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
Соединение DVD-плеера с  
телевизором с помощью  
компонентного видеокабеля :  
B
R
ëÓ‰ËÌËÚ ÚË „ÌÂÁ‰‡ (Y/VIDEO, C Ë C )  
Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3 Ë COMPONENT (ÔÓÎÌ˚È  
‚ˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) „ÌÂÁ‰‡ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ Ì  
Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl.  
á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ VIDEO-3 ̇  
äéåèéçÖçíçõâ ÒÓ·ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ  
“VIDEO-3” ̇ ÒÚ. 28.  
Подсоединение устройств  
к панели OUTPUT  
ë˄̇Î˚ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚ı ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È  
ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó  
ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl ‚˚ıÓ‰flÚ ËÁ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT. èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌË‚ Çå Í  
Ô‡ÌÂÎË OUTPUT, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡Ú¸  
ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚ ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ.  
ÑÎfl ˝ÚÓ„Ó ‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå  
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT ÒÓ·ÒÌÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ  
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ.  
• чÌÌ˚È ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò  
Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ (Ò˄̇ÎÓÏ  
525P). (ÂÒÎË Ì‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚÒfl  
ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ˚È ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î).  
ÖÒÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚ Progressive  
‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚ (Ò˄̇Î˚ 525P) ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â  
ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚,  
ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ  
ÔÓÒ‰ÒÚ‚ÓÏ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó  
‚ˉÂÓ͇·ÂÎfl ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎËÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸  
Á‡ÔËÒ¸ ̇ ‰ËÒÍË DVD ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â  
ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO  
панели OUTPUT с гнездом  
VIDEO IN (видеовход)  
видеомагнитофона при  
помощи видеокабеля.  
37  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ  
2 Соедините гнезда AUDIO (L и  
R) панели OUTPUT с гнездами  
AUDIO IN (аудиовход L/R)  
видеомагнитофона при  
Примеры работы системы  
дистанционного  
управления AV COMPU  
LINK  
ç‡ÊËχfl ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PLAY ‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇  
ËÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÒχÚË‚‡Ú¸  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ̇ ‚̯ÌÂÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Â.  
помощи аудиокабеля.  
• èË ‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ÔÂÍ‡˘‡˛ÚÒfl Ò˄̇Î˚ ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ  
OUTPUT.  
ÖÒÎË Á‡„ÛÁËÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ‡ÌÌÛ˛ ÔÎÂÌÍÛ (̇  
͇ÒÒÂÚÂ Ò Û‰‡ÎÂÌÌ˚Ï Á‡˘ËÚÌ˚Ï flÁ˚˜ÍÓÏ) ‚  
Çå, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ¸.  
äÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ Ò˄̇Î˚, ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘Ë  
˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3/ CéåPéNENT,  
ÌÂθÁfl ‚˚‚ÂÒÚË ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT.  
ÇÍβ˜‡Ú¸ Ë ‚˚Íβ˜‡Ú¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ  
(̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl) Ë  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ˚ ÇàÑÖé ÏÓÊÌÓ Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔËÂÏÌË͇ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÄV.  
Подсоединение головных  
телефонов  
ê·ÓÚ‡ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU LINK Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡. ëÏ.  
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚ ÒÓ  
ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍËÏ ÏËÌ˯ÚÂÍÂÓÏ  
(‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ) Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı  
ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ̇ ÔÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
• èË ‚˚·Ó “áÇìäéÇéÉé  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,  
ëéèêéÇéÜÑÖçàü íÇ” ‚ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Â  
‚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
ÔËÂÏÌË͇ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV ÏÓÊÂÚ  
‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍË Ò‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl  
ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, Ú‡Í  
˜ÚÓ Á‚Û˜‡ÌË ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â  
Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ VOLUME-/+ ËÎË  
MUTING ÔÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÓÚÏÂÌËÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛  
ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ. Ç ÂÁÛθڇÚ  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Á‡Á‚Û˜‡Ú  
ÒÌÓ‚‡.  
ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı  
AV COMPU LINK  
ëËÒÚÂχ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV  
COMPU LINK Ó·ÂÒÔ˜˂‡ÂÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌË ÌÂÒÍÓθÍËÏË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ÏË ÔË  
‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÚÓθÍÓ Ó‰ÌËÏ  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ.  
èËÏÂÌËÚÂθÌÓ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ, ‚ ÂÁÛθڇÚ  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ‚̯ÌËÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ ·Û‰ÂÚ  
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ. ÑÎfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡  
ÏËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËfl ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÇàÑÖé Ì  
Ú·ÛÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ÔÛθڇ  
Условия, при которых  
можно использовать  
систему дистанционного  
управления AV COMPU  
LINK  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl.  
• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, Ëϲ˘Â  
‡Á˙ÂÏ AV COMPU LINK.  
38  
ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ  
• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ë  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ͇·ÂÎfl AV  
COMPU LINK.  
ä·Âθ AV COMPU LINK Ì ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚  
ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË  
͇·ÂÎfl AV COMPU LINK ÌÂÚ, ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ë ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛  
͇·ÂÎfl, ̇ Ó·ÓËı ÍÓ̈‡ı ÍÓÚÓÓ„Ó  
ËϲÚÒfl 3,5 ÏÏ (ÏÓÌÓ) ¯ÚÂÍÂ˚.  
• èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌ˲ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂÌË ‚̯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚” ̇  
ÒÚ. 36.  
2 Соедините гнездо AV COMPU  
LINK телевизора с гнездом AV  
COMPU LINK устройства с  
помощью кабеля AV COMPU  
LINK.  
3 Измените настройку  
устройства в соответствии с  
панелью VIDEO, с которой оно  
соединено.  
ìÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Í  
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé Ë  
Ô‡‚ËθÌÓ Ì‡ÒÚÓËÚ¸, Ë̇˜Â ÒËÒÚÂχ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU  
LINK Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸. ÅÓΠ 
ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“ç‡ÒÚÓÈ͇ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU LINK”.  
Если ВМ соединен с панелью  
VIDEO-1 :  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ ‰ÓÎÊÂÌ Ì‡ıÓ‰ËÚ¸Òfl ‚ ÂÊËÏ  
ÓÊˉ‡ÌËfl (Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER  
‰ÓÎÊÂÌ „ÓÂÚ¸ Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï). ÖÒÎË  
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ ̇ A.  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÓÚÍβ˜ÂÌ ÓÚ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌË͇  
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl (Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ì „ÓËÚ), ÒËÒÚÂχ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl AV COMPU  
LINK ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ.  
Если DVD-плеер соединен с  
панелью VIDEO-1 :  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-  
ÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD2.  
Если ВМ соединен с панелью  
VIDEO-2 :  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl  
Настройка системы  
дистанционного  
управления AV COMPU LINK  
‚ˉÂÓχ„ÌËÚÓÙÓ̇ ̇ B.  
Если DVD-плеер соединен с  
панелью VIDEO-2 :  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-  
ВНИМАНИЕ :  
• ëÔÓÒÓ·˚ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍË ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÓÚ΢‡˛ÚÒfl ÓÚ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÌËÊ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡. èÂ‰ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËÂÏ  
̇ÒÚÓÈÍË Ó·flÁ‡ÚÂθÌÓ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ  
ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Û.  
ÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD3.  
Если DVD-плеер соединен с  
панелью VIDEO-3 с помощью  
компонентного видеокабеля :  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-  
ÔÎÂÂ‡ ̇ DVD1.  
1 Подсоедините устройство к  
панели VIDEO-1 или VIDEO-2  
телевизора.  
• àÌÒÚÛ͈ËË ÔÓ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˲ ̇ÒÚÓÂÍ  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÒÏ. ‚ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ı ÔÓ  
ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.  
При подсоединении DVD-  
плеера к телевизору с  
помощью компонентного  
видеокабеля :  
• ÖÒÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌflÂÏÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ì  
ËÏÂÂÚ ÌË ÍÓ‰‡ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
èÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ Í Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl, ÌË ÂÊËχ AV COMPULINK,  
ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌËÚÂ Â„Ó ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-1.  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
39  
Устранение неисправностей  
ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÓÏ ‚ÓÁÌË͇ÂÚ ÔÓ·ÎÂχ, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË  
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ” ÔÂ‰ ÚÂÏ Í‡Í Ó·‡˘‡Ú¸Òfl Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. ùÚ‡ ËÌÙÓχˆËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÏÓ˜¸ Ç‡Ï ‚  
ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËË ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ·ÂÁ ÔÓÒÚÓÓÌÌÂÈ ÔÓÏÓ˘Ë. ÖÒÎË, ̇ÔËÏÂ, ‚ËÎ͇ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl  
‚˚ÒÍӘ˷ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË ËÎË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚̇ ‡ÌÚÂÌ̇, ÏÓÊÂÚ ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ¸ ‚Ô˜‡ÚÎÂÌËÂ, ˜ÚÓ  
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.  
Внимание :  
• Ç ‰‡ÌÌÓÏ ‡Á‰ÂΠ‡ÒÒχÚË‚‡˛ÚÒfl ÚÓθÍÓ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚, ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍË ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌÂӘ‚ˉÌ˚.  
ÖÒÎË Û Ç‡Ò ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ÔÓ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ì˲ ͇ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ Ò̇˜‡Î‡  
ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ‡Á‰ÂÎ ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡, ‡ Ì ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË  
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”.  
• ÖÒÎË ÌË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÂÍÓÏẨ‡ˆËÈ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”, ÌË Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËfl ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ Ì ۉ‡ÎÓÒ¸, ‚˚̸Ú  
‚ËÎÍÛ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË Ë Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. ç Ô˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸  
ÓÚÂÏÓÌÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ò‡ÏÓÒÚÓflÚÂθÌÓ, Ì ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÈÚ Á‡‰Ì˛˛ Í˚¯ÍÛ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ Ì  
‚˚Íβ˜‡ÂÚÒfl  
èÎÓıÓ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl  
• ÇÒÚ‡‚ÎÂ̇ ̇ ÎË ‚ËÎ͇ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl ‚  
ÓÁÂÚÍÛ?  
• ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ·ÎÓÍËÛ˛Ú  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË (ÒÌ„) Ô˘Ë̇ ÏÓÊÂÚ  
Á‡Íβ˜‡Ú¸Òfl ‚ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÏ Í‡·ÂΠËÎË  
‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ. èÓ‚Â¸Ú ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ:  
ÉÓËÚ ÎË Ë̉Ë͇ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER?  
ÖÒÎË ÓÌ Ì „ÓËÚ, ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ  
‚˚Íβ˜‡ÚÂÎfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl.  
è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓ‰ËÌÂ̇  
‡ÌÚÂÌ̇ Í ÚÂ΂ËÁÓÛ?  
ç ÔÓ‚ÂʉÂÌ ÎË Í‡·Âθ?  
è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓËÂÌÚËÓ‚‡Ì‡  
‡ÌÚÂÌ̇?  
çÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl/  
çÂÚ Á‚Û͇  
àÒÔ‡‚̇ ÎË Ò‡Ï‡ ‡ÌÚÂÌ̇?  
• ç fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÎË Ò˄̇Π‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÒÎ˯ÍÓÏ Ò··˚Ï? Ç ˝ÚÓÏ  
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â Ò‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl ëàçàâ  
îéç – ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ, Á‚ÛÍ  
ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒfl. ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ‚Ò Ê ıÓÚËÚ  
ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚ  
ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË ÙÛÌ͈ËË “ëàçàâ îéç” Ì‡  
ÒÚ. 26 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ  
ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ̇ Çõäã.  
• ÖÒÎË ‚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ËÎË ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ  
̇‚Ó‰flÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ ‰Û„Ëı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,  
̇ ˝Í‡Ì ÏÓ„ÛÚ ÔÓfl‚ËÚ¸Òfl ÔÓÎÓÒ˚ ËÎË  
‰Û„Ë ÔÓÏÂıË. ì‡ÎËÚ ڇÍË  
ÔÓÏÂıÓ„ÂÌÂËÛ˛˘Ë ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Í‡Í  
ÛÒËÎËÚÂÎË, ÍÓÏÔ¸˛ÚÂ˚, ÙÂÌ˚, ÓÚ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ËÎË ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ ‰Û„ÓÏ ÏÂÒÚÂ. ÖÒÎË ‚  
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ ̇‚Ó‰flÚÒfl ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ  
• è‡‚ËθÌ˚ ÎË Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰Îfl ëàëíÖåõ  
áÇìäÄ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·? èÓ˜ÚËÚ  
ÓÔËÒ‡ÌË “äÌÓÔ͇ SOUND SYSTEM” ̇  
ÒÚ. 12 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸  
ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ.  
‡‰ËÓχ˜Ú˚ ËÎË ‚˚ÒÓÍÓ‚ÓθÚÌ˚ı ÎËÌËÈ,  
Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ.  
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÔËÌËχÂÚ Ò˄̇Î,  
ÓÚ‡ÊÂÌÌ˚È ÓÚ „Ó ËÎË Á‰‡ÌËÈ,  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ·Û‰ÂÚ ‰‚ÓËÚ¸Òfl.  
èÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ËÁÏÂÌËÚ¸ ÓËÂÌÚ‡ˆË˛  
‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ËÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸  ÌÓ‚ÓÈ,  
ӷ·‰‡˛˘ÂÈ ÎÛ˜¯ÂÈ Ì‡Ô‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÒÚ¸˛.  
40  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ  
• Ñ·ÈÚ ÎË ‚˚ ÔÓÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ ëàëíÖåÄ  
ñÇÖíçéëíà ‰Îfl ÚÂÎÂ͇̇·  
Ô‡‚ËθÌÓ?ÑÎfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËfl ˝ÚÓÈ  
ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“äÌÓÔ͇ COLOUR SYSTEM” ̇  
ÒÚ. 11.  
íÂ΂ËÁÓ Ì  
‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ  
• ç ÔÓ‡ ÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË ‚ ÔÛθÚ  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl?  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ ÌÓ‚˚ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË Òӄ·ÒÌÓ  
ËÌÒÚÛ͈ËflÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ìÒÚ‡Ìӂ͇  
·‡Ú‡ÂÂÍ ‚ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 4.  
• è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ñÇÖí Ë  
üêäé? ÑÎfl „ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËfl ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ  
ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“ê„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌË  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl” ̇ ÒÚ. 20.  
• ç Ô˚Ú‡ÂÚÂÒ¸ ÎË Ç˚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÔÛÎ¸Ú  
‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl,  
• á‡ÔËÒ¸ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ Çå Ì  
ÂÍÓÏẨÛÂÚÒfl, Ú.Í. ÓÌ ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡ÔËÒ‡Ú¸Òfl  
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓ.  
̇ıÓ‰fl˘ËÈÒfl ÒÁ‡‰Ë ËÎË Ò·ÓÍÛ ËÎË Ì‡  
‡ÒÒÚÓflÌËË ·ÓΠ7 Ï ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡?  
ê‡ÒÔÓÎÓÊËÚ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó  
ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl ÒÔÂÂ‰Ë ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, ̇  
‡ÒÒÚÓflÌËË Ì ·ÓΠ7 Ï ÓÚ Ì„Ó.  
• üÍË ·ÂÎ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl (̇ÔËÏÂ,  
·ÂÎÓ Ô·ڸÂ) ÏÓ„ÛÚ ‚˚„Îfl‰ÂÚ¸ ̇  
˝Í‡ÌÂ Í‡Í ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚Â.  
ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓ ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËÂ,  
Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÓÒÓ·ÂÌÌÓÒÚflÏË ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡,  
ÓÌÓ Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛.  
çÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚ‡ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ ÔË  
ÛıÓ‰Â Ò ˝Í‡Ì‡ flÍÓ„Ó ·ÂÎÓ„Ó  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡  
ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÏÂÌ˛ ÌÂθÁfl. ç‡ÊÏËÚ  
ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îfl ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËfl Ò  
ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ̇ Ó·˚˜ÌÛ˛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÛ Ë  
ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚ ‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛.  
• ç ‚Íβ˜ÂÌ ÎË áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ? ÖÒÎË  
ÙÛÌ͈Ëfl áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂ̇  
̇ Çäã, ÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òfl ÔÂ‰ÌËÏË  
ÍÌÓÔ͇ÏË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂθÁfl.  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ ̇ Çõäã,  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖ┠̇ ÒÚ. 26.  
• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò  
ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı Ëϲ˘ËıÒfl ‚  
ÔÓ‰‡Ê ԇÍÂÚÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌÓ„Ó  
Ó·ÂÒÔ˜ÂÌËfl ‰Îfl ‚ˉÂÓ ËÎË  
ÌÂÔ‡‚ËθÌÓ Ò‰Â·ÌÌ˚ı ‚ˉÂÓÁ‡ÔËÒÂÈ  
‚ÂıÌflfl ˜‡ÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ÏÓÊÂÚ  
ËÏÂÚ¸ ËÒ͇ÊÂÌËfl.  
• ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ÔÂÂÒÚ‡ÂÚ  
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ‚˚Íβ˜ËÚ ÔËÚ‡ÌË ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ  
ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl. á‡ÚÂÏ Â˘Â ‡Á ̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ  
‰Îfl ‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl. ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ  
̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ ÔÓÒΠ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓχθÌÓ  
‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.  
ùÚÓ Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÓ Ò ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓÏ, ‡ ÌÂ Ò  
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡.  
èÎÓıÓ ͇˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó  
Á‚Û͇  
• èË ÔËÂÏ Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇ÎÓ‚  
(Ò˄̇ÎÓ‚ 525P) ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ë ÙÛÌ͈ËË Ì  
‡·ÓÚ‡˛Ú;  
èÛθڇ ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl:  
ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE Ë ÍÌÓÔ͇  
STROÇE.  
îÛÌ͈ËË åÖçû:  
óÖíäé, ñÇ. íéç, ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò,  
Digipure Ë ZOOM.  
• è‡‚ËθÌÓ ÎË ÓÚ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ÅÄë Ë  
íÖåÅê? ÖÒÎË ÌÂÚ, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ  
„ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË, ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“ê„ÛÎËӂ͇ Á‚Û͇” ̇ ÒÚ. 24.  
• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ÏÓ„ÛÚ  
‚ÓÁÌË͇ڸ ÚÛ‰ÌÓÒÚË Ò ÔÓÒÎۯ˂‡ÌËÂÏ  
ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó ËÎË ‰‚ÛflÁ˚˜ÌÓ„Ó  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ  
ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ËÒÔÓθÁÛfl ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚  
‡Á‰ÂΠ“CTEPEO / I II” ̇ ÒÚ. 24,  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ËÚÂÒ¸ ̇ ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËÂ.  
41  
ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ  
• èË ÔËÍÓÒÌÓ‚ÂÌËË Í ˝Í‡ÌÛ  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó˘Û˘‡Ú¸Òfl ΄ÍËÈ  
˝ÎÂÍÚ˘ÂÒÍËÈ ‡Áfl‰ ÒÚ‡Ú˘ÂÒÍÓ„Ó  
˝ÎÂÍÚ˘ÂÒÚ‚‡. ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓ  
fl‚ÎÂÌËÂ, Ò‚flÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ  
ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡, ÓÌÓ Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl  
ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. íÍÓÈ ÒÚ‡Ú˘ÂÒÍËÈ  
‡Áfl‰ Ì Ô˘ËÌflÂÚ ‚‰‡ Ó„‡ÌËÁÏÛ  
˜ÂÎÓ‚Â͇.  
ÑÛ„ËÂ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚  
• èË ‚Íβ˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌ͈ËË íÄâåÖê  
ÇõäãûóÖçàü ËÎË ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ  
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ‡‚ÚÓχÚ˘ÂÒÍÓ  
‚˚Íβ˜ÂÌË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ‚˚Íβ˜ËÎÒfl,  
̇ÊÏËÚ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËfl POWER ‰Îfl Â„Ó  
‚Íβ˜ÂÌËfl. ÖÒÎË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ̇˜Ë̇ÂÚ  
ÌÓχθÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.  
• ÖÒÎË ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ÔË ÔÓ‰Íβ˜ÂÌËË  
̇ۯÌËÍÓ‚ Á‚ÛÍ ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ  
íÇ Ì ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡Î, ËÁÏÂÌËÚ ̇ÒÚÓÈÍÛ TV  
ÉêéåäéÉéÇéê. ‚ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄìôçàäà ̇  
Çõäã. èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚ ҂‰ÂÌËfl ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰  
Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.  
• ÖÒÎË ‚·ÎËÁË ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ Ó͇ÊÂÚÒfl  
χ„ÌËÚÌÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, Ú‡ÍÓÂ Í‡Í  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂθ, ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË  
ËÒ͇ÊÂÌË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl ËÎË ‚ ۄ·ı  
˝Í‡Ì‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ËÒ͇ÊÂÌË  
ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚. ì‡ÎËÚ χ„ÌËÚÌÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó  
ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ‚ÓÁÌË͇˛Ú  
ÓÚ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ, ÔÂÂȉËÚ ̇  
ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌË ˝Í‡ÌËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚ı  
„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ.  
• àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËflÌËfl χ„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎfl áÂÏÎË  
ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ÔÂÂÍÓÒ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. ÑÎfl ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËfl ÔÂÂÍÓÒ‡  
ËÒÔÓθÁÛÈÚ ËÌÙÓχˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ 
“PICTURE TILT” ̇ ÒÚ. 23.  
• èË ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË Ú‡ÍËı ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Í‡Í  
ÔÂÂÍβ˜ÂÌËÂ Ò ÚÂÎÂ͇̇· ̇  
ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Π‚ÓÁÌË͇ÂÚ Í‡ÚÍÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌ˚È  
ÔÂÂ˚‚ ‚ ÔÂ‰‡˜Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl. ùÚÓ  
Ì fl‚ÎflÂÚÒfl ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. ùÚÓÚ  
ÔÂÂ˚‚ ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏ ‰Îfl ÒÚ‡·ËÎËÁ‡ˆËË  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
• èË ÂÁÍÓÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË ÚÂÏÔÂ‡ÚÛ˚  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÂÚ ËÁ‰‡‚‡Ú¸  
ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌË ÔË ˝ÚÓÏ  
ÌÓχθÌ˚, ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ. ÖÒÎË  
ÔË ‡·ÓÚ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌË  
ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ, ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ‰Û„Ë  
Ô˘ËÌ˚ ˝ÚÓ„Ó fl‚ÎÂÌËfl – ̇ ‚ÒflÍËÈ  
ÒÎÛ˜‡È ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÔÓÒËÚ¸ χÒÚÂ‡  
ÔÓ‚ÂËÚ¸ ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ.  
42  
Технические данные  
íÂ΂¢‡ÚÂθÌ˚ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚:  
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË:  
ä‡Ì‡Î˚ Ë ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚  
B, G, I, D, K, K1, M  
PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4,43 MHz  
ä̇ΠÌËÁÍÓÈ VHF (VL) = 46,25 - 168,25 Ɉ  
ä̇Π‚˚ÒÓÍÓÈ VHF (VH) = 175,25 - 463,25 Ɉ  
ä̇ΠUHF (U)  
= 471,25 - 863,25 Ɉ  
èËÌËχÂÚ Í‡·ÂθÌ˚ ÚÂÎÂ͇̇Î˚ ‚ Ò‰ÌÂÏ ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌ  
(X - Z + 2, S1 - S10), ÒÛÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌ (S11 - S20) Ë „ËÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌ  
(S21 - S41).  
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÏÛθÚËÔÎÂÍÒÌÓ„Ó  
Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓʉÂÌËfl  
ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡  
üÁ˚ÍË ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡  
èËÚ‡ÌË  
A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K)  
FLOF (Fastext), WST (World Standard Text)  
ëÏ. Ú‡·ÎËˆÛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂΠ“üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” ̇ ÒÚ. 34.  
èÂ. ÚÓÍ 110 - 240 Ç, 50/60 Ɉ  
ÄÛ‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰  
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-1  
çÓÏË̇θ̇fl ‚˚ıӉ̇fl ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸: 20 ÇÚ + 20 ÇÚ  
êÁ˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1  
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.  
êÁ˙ÂÏ RCA X 3  
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-2  
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.  
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-3/COMPONENT êÁ˙ÂÏ RCA X 5  
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰/ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È ‚ˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ (Y/C‚/CR) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.  
• ç‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡˛ÚÒfl Progressive ‚ˉÂÓÒ˄̇Î˚ (Ò˄̇Î˚ 525P).  
êÁ˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1  
• ÇˉÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.  
êÁ˙ÂÏ RCA X 3,  
è‡ÌÂθ VIDEO-4  
è‡ÌÂθ OUTPUT  
• ÇˉÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.  
ÉÌÂÁ‰Ó „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌ˘ÂÒÍÓ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ)  
ÑÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂθÌ˚ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ èÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒڇ̈ËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËfl X 1 (RM-C214)  
ŇڇÂÈÍË AA/R6 X 2  
ÉÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË  
HV-34LPZ: 12 ÒÏ, ÍÛÎ˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛÎ˚Â, x2.  
HV-29LPZ: 10 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛÎ˚Â, x2.  
HV-34LPZ: å‡ÍÒËχθ̇fl 255 ÇÚ, Ò‰Ìflfl 170 ÇÚ  
HV-29LPZ: å‡ÍÒËχθ̇fl 254 ÇÚ, Ò‰Ìflfl 170 ÇÚ  
HV-34LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 87ÒÏ ê‡ÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl 80 ÒÏ  
HV-29LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 73ÒÏ êÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl 68 ÒÏ  
HV-34LPZ: 898 ÏÏ X 728 ÏÏ X 579 ÏÏ  
èÓÚ·ÎflÂχfl ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸  
êÁÏÂ ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡  
(ÔÓ ‰Ë‡„Ó̇ÎË)  
É·‡ËÚ˚ (Ñ X Ç X ò)  
HV-29LPZ: 732 ÏÏ X 588 ÏÏ X 518 ÏÏ  
ÇÂÒ  
HV-34LPZ: 75 Í„  
HV-29LPZ: 48 Í„  
Конструкция и технические данные могут быть изменены без  
уведомления.  
àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl, ÔÓÎÛ˜‡ÂÏ˚ ̇ ˝Í‡Ì ‚ ÂÁÛθڇÚ ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡ÌËfl ÙÛÌ͈ËÈ ZOOM  
ÚÂ΂ËÁÓ‡, Á‡Ô¢‡ÂÚÒfl ËÒÔÓθÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îfl ͇ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÍÓÏÏÂ˜ÂÒÍËı ËÎË  
‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËÓÌÌ˚ı ˆÂÎÂÈ ‚ Ó·˘ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ÏÂÒÚ‡ı (͇ÙÂ, „ÓÒÚËÌˈ‡ı Ë Ú.Ô.) ·ÂÁ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËfl  
Ô‰‚‡ËÚÂθÌÓ„Ó Òӄ·ÒËfl ÓÚ ‚·‰ÂθˆÂ‚ ‡‚ÚÓÒÍËı Ô‡‚ ̇ ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚È ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ  
ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËfl.  
43  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  

JVC GM P421U User Manual
Lenovo Computer Hardware 4223 User Manual
LG Electronics LG Life Good Computer Monitor W1943TB User Manual
Moxa Technologies THINKCORE W311 User Manual
Oricom ECO700 User Manual
Panasonic CF VDL02BM User Manual
Panasonic CT 32SX31E User Manual
Philips 25TS56C User Manual
Philips Brilliance 170P6EB User Manual
Philips CD4403B User Manual